Home

IBM 19 Printer User Manual

Contents

1. 2 46 Security card 0004 8 13 Sheet feederz osuere tst 8 1 System software 1 8 8 51 G 4 Upgrades ceee oer 1 8 8 51 Waste toner pack as 2 30 Intel 65 n seis pete deste s 1 12 Interface c ori AA AA TEA LE oea G 2 Interfaces Choosing emulation for 3 23 Network 1 11 3 1 4 28 B 2 Printera Lem dope uk B 2 SCSI sss t ERA AO 1 13 B 2 B 3 Internal hard disk 1 13 9 19 B 3 B 8 Iden fying eset wanes 8 45 Problems seeslsees esses 9 19 Reformat sis ipo gu Gk eG 8 50 8 52 I 8 DUNG Lue che pue coe us esos auf B 3 Internet ioo suh Da ee Petit vinh A 2 ITC Bookman sessessss 7 18 ITC Zapf Chancery 7 19 ITC Zapf Dingbats 7 19 J Jam tecoVerys3 4c oes i anand ponte 4 49 Enabling i ene 9 17 Jams See Paper jams Job timeout 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 4 22 K K Mem Disk Cache option 4 44 D 8 K Mem Display option D 8 K Mem Emul Tmp option 4 44 D 7 K Mem Emulation option 4 43 D 6 K Mem for PSHeap option 4 43 D 5 K Mem for Spool 4 53 K Mem for Spool option 4 43 D 5 K Mem Framebuff option D 5 K Mem PS Fonts option 4 43 D 6 Kanji Option Kit B 8 Keypad hiring ees Lr pe 1 11 Keys Lesen ose pur ep OPUS 4 5 Keys See Control panel Kodak ColorSense 7 13
2. 8 50 Frame B ffer esee vet D 5 Frequency eere 2 3 7 6 7 7 See also Halftones FUSER OIL EMPTY 9 2 FUSER OIL LOW 6 12 9 2 Fuser unit PAG DES e e en bre ep uod 2 44 Pressure release pieces 2 20 6 22 Replacing rias te crees 9 4 Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 G Halftones Angles i ESE PE EY 7 7 CHOOSING eco AA eR ett y oe 4 28 Frequency coepere eres 7 7 Printer iiie sient o RT Db Res 7 6 Screen lines i eosdem os Ce es 7 7 Halftones printer default Changing eo Asdo A CREER EP 7 9 Handling printer 0 6 26 Hard disk oie dad aa Cae B 3 D 9 External 242a ewe 1 13 8 43 B 8 Formatting 8 44 8 45 Identifying zd et Dp Dee 8 45 Installing a font 8 47 Installing an emulation 8 47 See Internal Loading emulations 8 43 Loading fonts 0 8 43 RAM cots aed Melati eat ie i elses 8 44 Read rtorz deed ect E 8 44 Reformatted uso 8 52 Removing a font 8 48 Removing an emulation 8 48 SGSIDpOortzzd AA A EOE alas 8 43 SIZE e eR were AIDA Ae EAI NR QN B 3 M riteiertOb s ceo oem e 8 44 Hard disk kit eae a 8 39 Hdwe Flow Ctl Serial interface ua 4 24 Header inputbin au ao 4 38 Header page oa DEA TU ADA AE 4 38 Header Page option 4 38 Heavy stock 0 00000 5 11 Med
3. 0005 1 8 Software Loadable System SLS 1 8 Energy Saver Mode bi e ee ee 1 8 QMS Crown Operating System 1 9 Media Flexibility 000005 1 11 Automatic Jam Recovery 005 1 11 Convenient Control Panel Operation 1 11 PS Executive Series Utilities 1 12 PostScript Level 2 Compatibility 1 12 Resident HP PCL 5C and HP GL Emulation 1 12 Intel RISC based Controller 1 12 39 Resident PostScript Fonts 1 13 Printer Options aa a 1 13 Initial Printer Setup Introduction ee A DA eese 2 1 Finding a Good Location for Your Printer 2 2 Location Requirements Lun ue ee 2 2 What s Included in the Shipment 2 4 QMS Product Registration 2 5 Unpacking the Printer 0 000004 2 6 Installing Developer and Toner Cartridges 2 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Removing the Pressure Release Pieces Installing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle Installing the Waste Toner Pack Installing the OPC Belt Cartridge Filling the Paper Cassette 004 Starting the Printer 0 00000 Connecting the Power Cord Using the Power Switches The Start up Page au ue ee ee ee Installing Option
4. 00 9 3 Options iae iiaae 4 37 5 21 Reinitialization aeae eseuen 9 25 Remote power Switch 2 44 B 2 Remove Option option 4 53 Repas ata GA Sut SE EOS A 3 REPLACE BELT 6 10 9 3 REPLACEFUSER 9 4 Replacement parts Printers isse nhe eS 34 bt dees B 7 Reprinting jammed pages 9 17 Requirements Electricals nata me ebd B 3 Environmental 0 B 4 Frequency o sete eA whe ee be had B 3 POWED Lo e Soupe oe voe ente B 3 Power consumption B 3 Resident typefaces lusus 7 18 Resolution 1 8 1 13 4 48 B 1 Changing secte bI Ea 4 48 Printet 2b sens 1 8 1 13 4 48 B 1 Restore Defaults option 4 50 D 3 Retu ionet aa UNC Se tse siden tally ed acea B 14 Return Merchandise Authorization See RMA Reverse image HP GL 4 32 RMA Lose erm geen oe ood A 3 Robust XON XOFF 4 23 S SA media reps eR Mas 5 1 Sample page 4 38 5 21 9 3 Sample Page option 4 38 5 21 Saving changes 000 4 12 Scalable PCL fonts 7 20 scale operator selle ess 5 11 Scaling percent HP GL 4 32 Scaling plots 4 32 Serate hesena Ske hee E UNE VES 9 31 Screen angles MOTE Ce rPbheEAUU nC EE RR 7 6 Screen fonts Macintosh usus 1 11 3 4 Screen lines See also Frequency
5. 9 26 Labels d bak aed pt Sted 5 7 Print quality problems 9 28 Problem quick check 9 20 PIOCeSS Lei docte e Sot ete ea B 1 Service call messages 9 4 Single sheets 5 3 Speedo cue s de da AA Ete nes B 2 Status messages aus ae 9 1 Variables UIS Ue LER 7 1 Printing modes 0005 3 23 PRINTING STATUS ss 9 3 PRINTING TEST 000 9 3 PrintMonitor 0 0000 3 5 Problems Checklist eese trod ed dice de 9 20 See Troubleshooting Product modification C l Protocol ere ERAS as 9 22 Troubleshooting 9 22 PS Executive Series Utilities 4 1 Printer configuration 4 51 PS Executive Utilities 1 11 3 4 3 12 Color chart file ua 7 16 Documentation sues 1 11 PS protocol 204 D 10 D 12 Advantages 0000 D 13 Binary sedora ol eatin Ada D 12 Binary fixed 00 0 D 13 For network interface cards 4 28 Implementation D 13 Normalin datus est PEERS D 12 Normal fixed 0005 D 12 Parallel interface 4 26 Quoted character as coo siens D 11 Serial interface 4 24 D 12 PS wait timeout cae we oss ab ew ek US 4 21 PUT PAPER IN INPUT BIN 9 3 I 14 Q BAX ue rr hes 1 5 3 13 A 1 ACCOSSOTIES a Ls sea racbe ha or
6. Fig 5 1 Set the Cassette Size Key Print Media and Daily Operations 5 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 From the wrapping determine which is the printing side of the media then remove a stack of media 1 approx 27 mm or less If you re using paper fan it to prevent the sheets from sticking together Don t fan transparencies or labels because this can cause jams Align the edges of the stack on a flat surface and load it in the cassette so the top edge will lead into the printer and the printing side is up You can load up to 250 sheets of paper or 50 transparencies Label stock varies in thickness just make sure it does not exceed the upper limit load mark on the cassette Adjust the paper guides on each side of the media so that they rest lightly against it without causing it to buckle Slide the filled cassette into the printer until it is flush with the front of the printer NOTE Make sure the printer is configured for the media type paper or transparency you have in the cassette or print quality could degrade Media type can be selected through the printer s front panel Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Manual Feed You can feed a single sheet at a time to the printer using the manual feed tray This allows you to print on a different media type without changing the media in the ca
7. 00 9 1 Check waste toner 9 1 Close manual feed tray 9 1 Contrast oo o opes d Macon ts 5 15 Dark verticallines LLL 9 32 Data LED s 5 sees 9 21 9 24 Developer unit low 9 1 Developer unit misinstalled 9 2 Double feeding 9 18 ESP mode eer one Sap ttt oes 9 21 Fuser oil empty 9 2 Hard disk bt teh aye hkl wg 8 44 Image not centered 9 31 Incomplete Jobs 9 26 Inner jam 94 bee ees 9 2 9 9 Installing print system software 8 51 Internal hard disk sss 9 19 Jamrecovery na AA esses 4 49 Macintosh i ata paea 9 22 Macintosh applications 9 25 Mechanical problems 9 24 Media jams 9 18 9 19 Misfeed jam 9 3 9 6 Missing dots 9 31 Outerj m nane peton inni at 9 3 9 14 Paper jam message 9 17 PG us ces SEA EA ale ausa 9 22 Print quality o epe te unos 9 28 Printer resets o usuais sae ds ues 9 25 Protocol osr ors Aba eas eas Oe as 9 22 Quick cheek i ok cached es bag wad bee 9 20 Read error ee e oer v Bees 8 44 Reinitialization 9 25 Replace belt 0000 9 3 Replace Fuser 0 000 9 4 Scratches orenen TETA oe ond 9 31 Service calls eer y ewe DE 9 34 I 18 Side panel open 9 3 Smudges gua hie cee re rre 9532
8. 1 10 ESP TE enters ate eese 1 9 Multitasking 1 9 NINE 1 9 Spooling overflow 1 10 Technical reference 1 5 B 8 Cuil Ete e ete D Ded bins 6 26 Customer support auia ae ea A 1 OFAR oec CREA mee MS A 1 D Data bits 32 55 2 bam ve er 3 20 Serial interface ua 4 24 Data LED dun sch ae set nieces Sas 4 4 Troubleshooting 9 21 9 24 Dataproducts Conversion 02 0ee eee 8 33 Conversion kit 8 33 B 8 Jumpets 2r REFER 8 35 R SIStOIS iade re Ren 8 36 Sh ntS i Poets lee sets SoG Or 8 35 DB25 Re ERR 3 10 Declaration Manufacturer Importer C 2 DECHE arena Sr taun ene 1 11 4 28 1 4 Defaults Halftone option 4 28 Interfaces cusa bI eee ee 3 17 Paper dbi eee ose ete TO od 4 47 Preventing changes to 4 8 4 50 Restore factory 4 2 4 50 9 26 D 3 DEV LOW c ees eR 6 7 9 1 Developer Contaminating 6 3 Handlings 4 2 thao eU 6 3 Installation oonan 0 000 2 11 Measurement 6 4 6 7 6 10 B 7 G 3 PIANOS ook ue bE de ano enden need OFF Spills ds a ATADA dA RT OEEPS 6 3 Developer cartridge Consumables 00 B 7 Installing 000 2 15 6 9 Replacing 4 e e Sn do dn DS 6 4 Securing latches ou ao 6 8 When moving printer 6 19 DEVELOPER UNIT MISINSTALLED 9 2 Dimensions 000 B 2 DINSS8 gee opener bp
9. 4 28 Parallel cscs oe sion dared macs xn 4 25 PS Wait Timeout option 4 21 Serial interface 00 4 22 Timeouts option 4 21 Compile ahead processing 1 10 CTOWD 5 0 ecd Abeer AG mis n De Os 1 10 Compressed data format 1 10 Index COWI S ab MAT n hae 1 10 CompuServe 00 1 5 A 2 Application notes A 2 Printer drivers 00 000 A 2 QMS announcements A 2 Technical information A 2 Concurrent interfaces See SIO Configuration See Menu Configuration menu USING sisi AA AE tremere t 4 8 Whento sase A EReRERRPEA 4 2 Configuration printer Using applications 41 Using DOC functions 4 1 Using HP PCL 5C commands 4 1 Using HP GL commands 4 1 Using PostScript commands 4 1 Using printer commands 4 1 Using PS Executive 4 1 Connection AppleTalk 52 2 ess ad eacige ed this 4 26 Wocal Talks roerei trotai ee 3 1 4 26 LocalTalk interface 4 26 Macintosh 0 0 sees 3 1 Parallel 3 4 oe o elo tet 3 11 Consumables Contaminating 6 3 Developer cartridges 6 2 6 3 B 7 Handling ae oie Res etm 6 2 Measurement 6 4 6 7 6 10 B 7 G 3 Non QMS uuussss esses B 9 Oil Bottle Cleaning Pad B 7 OPC belt cartridge 6 2
10. INSTALL TO DISK COMPLETE Now use the following procedure to install the printer PostScript fonts Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Chapter 8 At the printer control panel press the Menu key The following appears in the printer message window QMS SOFTLOAD x x INSTALL TO DISK Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu Press the Next key until SERIAL appears in the second line of the message window Press the Select key to enter the SERIAL submenu The following message appears SERIAL TARGET DISK 6 Press the Select key The following message appears in the window INSTALL TO DISK CONNECTING At the Macintosh insert the disk labeled System Fonts 1 Macintosh shipped with your printer in your Macintosh s floppy disk drive Start FontLoader from the floppy disk drive by double clicking the FontLoader icon NOTE It s not necessary to copy FontLoader to the hard drive 18 This does not speed up the downloading process In the dialog box that appears make sure the correctdownload portis selected then choose the Send button When the font downloading is complete the message Download Complete appears on the Macintosh screen and the following appears in the printer message window Printer Options 8
11. Replacing the Controller Board Single In Line Memory Modules SIMMs Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color and color reproduction materials EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Installing a Network Interface Using an Optional Network Interface Centronics to Dataproducts Conversion Internal Hard Disk Installation Using External Hard Disks Identifying External Hard Disks Formatting an External Hard Disk Installing an Optional Card Font or Emulation Removing an Optional Card Font or Emulation Formatting the Internal Hard Disk Installing Print System Software and Fonts Troubleshooting ntroducton cei ereen eee Responding to Status Messages Service Call Messages usua ee ee Clearing Media Jams 62o e e e ee Clearing Misfeed Jams nunnana Clearing Inner Jams nono e e ee ee Clearing Outer Jams ou ue ee If the Media Jam Message Stays On Jam Recovery Preventing Media Jams 0005 Preventing Envelope Jams Internal Hard Disk Problems Miscellaneous Problems A Quick Check IBM PC and Compatible Computer Checklist Apple Macintosh Checklist Mechanical Problems 00000005 C
12. Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 The increased disk space allows more complex and longer collation sequences However there s a limit on how much can be collated at one time When 100 sheets are received for a print job or when a complex print jobs consumes all the collation disk space chunk collation occurs Chunk collation breaks a print job into smaller more manageable collation sections For example in figure 5 5 copies a and b of each collation section must be manually combined to create one collated print job Copy 1 a Copy 2 a Copy 3 a Copy 4 a Copy 1 b Copy 2 b Copy 3 b Copy 4 Fig 5 5 Chunk Collation The main advantages of collation are user convenience and time saved from not having to separate and sort individual copies of a print job Each copy exists as a whole unless chunk collation occurs If you print multiple jobs and choose collating you may want to add header and trailer pages to separate the jobs See the Administration Special Pages section in chapter 4 for details on how to print header and trailer pages Print Media and Daily Operations 5 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalbor
13. Repeat steps 5 through 12 to install the QMS driver for other ports or choose Close to exit the Printers dialog box Now you can set printer options from your application by choosing Print Setup from the application s File menu and then choosing the Connecting the Printer 3 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Options button Choose the Help button in any of the driver dialog boxes for information on driver options Printer Description Files PC Printer description files for Windows applications are included on the Windows Drivers disk shipped with your printer If you use QuarkXPress 3 3 after you install the QMS driver for Windows install the magicolor LX PDF according to the instructions in your QuarkXPress documentation for installing PDFs The table below shows which printer halftone setting will be in effect for the Quark LPI setting chosen LPI Halftone 15 to 44 Printer default 45 to 54 53 Ipi x 45 degrees 55 to 79 71 lpi x 45 degrees 80 to 89 80 Ipi x 45 degrees 90 to 99 Enhanced 100 to 125 106 lpi x 45 degrees 126 and higher Printer default If you use PageMaker 5 x use the version 4 PPD on our Windows Drivers disk Also Aldus requires that the Microsoft PostScript driver version 3 56 or later be used with PageMaker See your PageMaker documentation for installation instructions To be able to access magicolor LX features from the Microsoft driver add the QMS WPD file a
14. TARGET DISK 6 Press the Select key The following message appears in the window INSTALL TO DISK CONNECTING At your PC at the C QMSSYS prompt send the files you just extracted to the parallel port using the DOS copy command with the b binary file option copy b dl lpt1 l The software is installed when the following message appears INSTALL TO DISK COMPLETE Once you have completed installing the system software you are ready to restart the system as described here Press the Menu key The message window displays the following message OMS SOFTLOAD x x INSTALL TO DISK Press the Next key until the message window displays the following message OMS SOFTLOAD x x BOOT SYSTEM Press the Select key to enter the Boot System submenu The following message appears in the message window Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 20 21 22 23 Chapter 8 BOOT SYSTEM HARD DISK Press the Select key and the following message appears BOOT SYSTEM HARD DISK 6 Press the Select key The system begins loading and the following message displays BOOT SYSTEM LOADING At this point DO NOT TOUCH ANY KEYS until the following message appears DLE NOTE If you do touch some keys during this step you must go back to step 9 and start from there again At
15. 000 1 5 CI N oa ese ented 1 4 1 5 B 8 DOC functions 1 4 B 8 Electr ni 4 lt 4 eel n d LO aed a RI 1 5 AP PCL Sib A A hates 1 5 B 8 HP PCL SC technical notes 1 5 Network notes 1 4 B 8 Printer options 000 1 5 PS Executive Series Utilities 1 11 QUA neta anada ET Ctr avers 1 5 Technical reference 1 5 B 8 DOS commands mode 3 20 Drivers PO nata cule niunt Ie AA a 3 12 Windows installing 3 13 Drivers folder PDE pooride tr tse nue IHE RIS 3 8 POXA Ata eaten UH eed 3 8 PPD fis zd Sead scs dene 3 7 3 8 Duty Cycles so dA gels eae nbs B 2 E EfiColor AA AN tack OR 7 13 Electrical requirements PHIMter TE rx Red c3 2 3 B 3 Electronics emissions C 2 Electrostatic discharge B 10 Warranty 0 0 0 2 e ee eee B 10 Emissions Electronic 22 eee 9 ex C 2 Laser radiation Eo C 3 RAO eeaeee DEU Reda C 1 Emulation osc a desde acd Rn D 6 Temporaty aep asad PRS D 7 Emulation card 8 10 8 12 8 48 8 49 Index Installing 0 8 10 8 11 Removing 8 12 8 48 8 49 Emulation Sensing Processor See ESP mode Emulations 1 12 8 10 B 2 Cams iro eee reeta AA eroe A213 Context switching 1 10 Emulations menu 4 28 See also ESP Hexdump HP GL HP PCL SC LNO03 PostScript HP PCE 5 e
16. B 15 Bitmapped PCL fonts 7 20 Black and white printing 5 14 Blank pases nere ree RE 9 26 BOOEIman gis ded ok n VR EAS 7 18 Buffers Enlatging qu ecobe e end 8 22 See also Memory Spooling ns bes cata de Ihe ee D 5 Bulletin board QMS 3 13 A 1 Application notes 3 13 A 2 Printer drivers 00 0005 A 2 Protocol reesen eremana eed bee A 2 Technical information A 2 Utilities 2 2s xe nae aaa A 2 Business CRD 4 29 7 10 7 11 C Cable pinouts Centronics parallel B 13 IBM PC AT creaat 0 0000 cee ee B 12 IBM POA e EEATT B 12 LocalTalk cpr een RE yg B 11 Macintosh to serial port B 11 Parallel Dataproducts B 16 SQ al ssi ARENA AR DEN EI B 12 Cables Macintosh interface 3 2 PGC nterfacez aeo nere 3 10 RI E e ka I Rega 3 2 Calibration color 00 7 12 Calibration engine See Alignment See Registration CALL FOR SERVICE 9 4 Canada radio noise emissions C 1 Cancel key 2 ca RS 4 6 5 17 Cancelling ajob 4 6 5 17 CANCELLING JOB uusse 9 1 Cards Emulation 1 13 8 11 8 47 8 48 Font 522 3 2 1 13 8 11 8 47 8 48 Installing 8 10 8 11 8 13 8 47 Removing 8 12 8 48 8 49 I 2 Security iis cmq ne bU bed 8 13 8 14 Cassette Capacity cms peas ott POS amp 9 18 DLOWeE i 2 ENESE TE 1 13
17. Chapter 8 m An external power supply box not needed for all interfaces B An interface plate Your kit may contain additional parts not required for network interface installation on this particular printer 1 Follow the instructions in Removing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to eliminate electrostatic buildup before you begin Printer Options 8 27 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 2 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the two screws from the blank optional I O plate and then remove the plate from the interface panel and set it aside fig 8 17 Fig 8 17 Remove the Optional I O Plate 6 26 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 3 Examine the ends of the two plastic support posts that come with the smaller network interface card one end has a slightly larger diameter and the other end is slightly more tapered Insert the larger ends into the controller board fig 8 18 4 Snap the network interface card onto the plastic support posts fig 8 18 If you have trouble snapping the interface board onto the support posts you probably inserted the wrong ends of the posts into the controller board in step 3 5 Using the two screws you removed in step 2 fasten the new interface plate to network interface card to hold the card in place fig 8 18 Fig 8 18 Attach Support Posts to Controll
18. Outer Jam section later in this chapter for details A status page has been requested via the Print Status option in the Administration Special Pages menu This does not necessarily mean that the status page is printing at the particular moment the message is displayed since other jobs may be ahead of it in the job queue A sample page or a registration page has been requested This does not necessarily mean that the page is printing as the message is being displayed other jobs may be ahead of it in the job queue A media cassette is empty reload the cassette xxxxxx PAPER is the media size the cassette is currently configured for xxxxx INPUT BIN is the empty cassette See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for information on refilling cassettes The OPC belt cartridge needs to be replaced After installing the new cartridge you have to clear this message through the control panel using the Clear Warning option See chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for details on replacing the OPC belt cartridge and Administration Engine in chapter 4 for details on clearing the warning The waste toner cover is not fully closed Close the cover The top cover of the printer is either off or partially open Make sure it is seated properly and fully closed A toner cartridge is empty The x is replaced by the color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced See chapter 6 Consumable
19. Download Complete appears on the Macintosh screen and IDLE appears on the printer s message window Restart the printer to activate the new system software Installing System Software and Fonts from a Macin tosh to a Non Functional Printer If the current printer system software is not functioning you must connect your Macintosh to the printer s serial port to reinstall the system software and the printer fonts The download will not work over the LocalTalk interface in this case Your Macintosh vendor Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 can provide you with a cable with DIN 8 female and DB 25 male connectors for this or you can see appendix B Technical Specifications for the correct cable pinouts NOTE If you have access to a PC printer system software and Printer fonts can also be downloaded from the PC to the printer s parallel or serial port See Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC to a Non Functional Printer earlier in this chapter for instructions Connect the printer serial port to the Macintosh s printer or modem port The modem port provides the fastest download Usethe following procedure to decompress the SystemLoader program and install it on your Macintosh s hard disk a Insertthe System Software Macintosh disk provided with your printer in your Macintosh s floppy disk drive b Double click the SystemLo
20. L Label Formatting 2 08 350scsaeeue2e8 5 7 Labels Error recovery 00 9 17 Imageable region B 5 Loading me ER 5 7 Margins i 4426 She aoe ATE B 5 Printing syre ooh OFS casa uv aLa 5 7 Seleetion zo seats vie n AS 5 11 Landscapers acordan oean me ques 4 18 Languages See Emulations Laser paper vicum renes 1 11 5 11 See Paper Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Laser Preps oe ssepe SER S 3 5 9 25 Laser printing Variables sand potion eh tee bie eats 7 1 Laser radiation eo C 3 Lasersatetyuzc bebe f MEAS C 3 LaserWriter 0 3 5 9 25 LEDS hays se sta do dna ou alee 4 4 Legal Imageable region B 5 Margins ah tet Bice ab a GO ck Avs 5 10 B 5 Printing on secede ged eS 4 19 Mac m B 5 Letter Imageable region B 5 Margins oss secet tes 5 10 B 5 Printing on ice eo peal 4 19 SIZES aoc te bep Yd bal Ak B 5 Letterhead Prin ng On erp ERAI 5 8 Line Termination HP PCL5C 4 34 Dame printer iis se grid ied Ree eI B 2 Fontis de eere are oe ie 4 30 B 2 Optom yeh deen DA IAN ies EUR 4 30 Typefaces sehe eae 7 20 Lines per inch HP PCL 5C 4 33 LNO3 Plus Selecting oed RS 4 22 4 25 Loading Medid neta eere mU epe is 5 1 Localtalk 45 ER E cenit 3 1 B 2 See also AppleTalk Cable pinouts for port B 11 Interface uc een natns 4 26 Testing co
21. Printer Options 6 25 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 record of your changes before you go to the next step See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information on using the configuration menu 10 In the printer configuration menu use the Administration Miscellaneous Restore Defaults option to make the printer recognize the additional memory The Administration Memory section in chapter 4 Printer Configuration and Appendix D Additional Technical Information contain information about printer memory Installing a Network Interface This section describes how to install a network interface NOTE The QMS magicolor LX printer is compatible only magicolor LX network interfaces If anon magicolor LX interface is installed the following error message appears on the start up page Incompatible network option installed Also depending on which type of interface you are installing the interface card in the illustrations accompanying these instructions may look slightly different from your interface card but the installation procedure is the same Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the interface installation The network interface kit includes the following m An anti static wristband E A network interface card and two plastic support posts E A daughterboard and two plastic support posts Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500
22. The Optional Features Menus If you install a printer option for example a network interface card it may affect printer configuration and the Configuration 4 54 Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 menu Depending on what option you install you may have new menus and options in the Configuration menu which allow you to control the new option See the documentation accompanying your option to learn exactly how it affects the Configuration menu Printer Configuration 4 55 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Document Option Commands Your printer offers a wide range of capabilities for designing and printing documents However applications and printer emulations differ in their ability to access some of these document printing capabilities Document Option Commands DOCS provide a way to access printer features that cannot be accessed by your application or your printer emulations System administrators can use DOCs along with the host s network management software to generate personalized header pages for custom print queues or to activate special printer features for each user Following is a list of DOCs supported by the QMS magicolor LX printer For more information on these commands see QMS Crown Document Option Commands an optional manual available from your QMS vendor Header Trailer Page Commands Header pages IncludeF
23. The marketing and sale of this equipment was reported to the German Postal Service The right to retest this equipment to verify compliance with the regulation was given to the German Postal Service QMS Inc Mobile AL Electronics Emissions Your printer complies with the Electronics Emissions Requirements of the German Federal Minister for Postal and Telecommunication Technology regulation Vfg 1046 1984 Your printer complies with the Electronics Emissions Requirements of the European Economic Council directive 82 499 EEC Notices EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix C Laser Safety This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation Proprietary Statement The digitally encoded software included with the QMS magicolor LX printer is Copyrighted 1995 by QMS Inc All Rights Reserved This software may not be reproduced modified displayed transferred or copied in any form or in any manner or on any media in whole or in part without the express written per
24. Troubleshooting Chapter highlights Responding to status messages Clearing media jams Preventing media jams Internal hard disk problems Miscellaneous problems a quick check Mechanical problems Print quality problems Placing a service call EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Introduction Chapter 9 This chapter explains how to deal with control panel messages remove jams cancel jobs and troubleshoot printer problems Responding to Status Messages The following status messages may appear in the control panel message window x ACTIVE JOBS ADJUST xxxxx BIN BACK PANEL OPEN BELT CARTRIDGE MIS INSTALLED The printer is on line and one or more jobs are in progress The x is replaced by the number of jobs in the queue A media cassette is either not installed or installed incorrectly The xxxxx indicates the cassette in question Either install or reinstall the indicated cassette The back cover over the transfer unit is not fully closed Close the back cover The OPC belt cartridge is either not installed or incorrectly installed Either install a cartridge if one is not present or reinstall the current one correctly See chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for information on replacing the OPC belt cartridge CANCELLING The Cancel key has been used to cancel the current job JOB CHECK
25. graphics and text at 300 dpi resolution We recommend that you select Gamma80 gamma correction when using this halftone see Gamma Correction below for information 53 Ipi x 45 Halftone This setting minimizes visible gradations banding at 300 dpi but provides less detail than the 80 lpi x 45 halftone setting We recommend that you select Gamma53 gamma correction when using this halftone see Gamma Correction below for information These halftone settings are available through the QMS supplied Macintosh or Windows driver see chapter 3 Connecting the Printer for installation instructions and see the driver help for more information through the printer configuration menu Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Administration Emulations PostScript Default Halftone submenu and through PS Executive Series Utilities Color Screen Angles menu To see the effect of the currently selected default halftone print a Sample Page from the Administration Special Pages Sample Page submenu in the printer s front panel or from PS Executive Series Utilities NOTE A halftone selection made in an application or a driver overrides the printer default halftone setting Dither Pattern NOTE When using the Enhanced Halftone setting the Dither option should be set to Standard Dithering refers to the way halftone dots are placed on the page When print
26. in chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup Use the following procedure to remove and replace these pieces 1 Open the paper exit unit by pulling up on the unit latch and then tilting the unit back and down fig 2 13 2 Open the separator pawl unit by pulling back the two latches one on each side to unlock them and tilting the pawl unit back in the direction of the paper exit unit fig 2 14 3 Open the pressure release lever on the end of the fuser unit fig 2 15 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter CAUTION If you are replacing the pressure release pieces after the printer has been running make sure the fuser unit has cooled The fuser gets very hot and can damage these pieces 4 If you are replacing the two pressure release pieces one at each end of the fuser roller skip to step 5 If you are removing the pressure release pieces grasp the tab end of one of the pieces and gently pull it up and out of the printer fig 6 8 Remove the piece atthe other end ofthe fuser roller in the same manner then skip to step 6 ts AO Pressure Release Piece Separator Latch Fig 6 8 Remove the Pressure Release Pieces WARNING The fuser unit can become extremely hot and cause severe burns Make sure the unit is cool before handling it Nemec Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr hei werden so da Verbrennungsgefahr besteht
27. l Next EMULATIONS ESP DEFAULT Optional EMULATIONS EMULATIONS OPTIONAL EMULATION POSTSCRIPT EMULATIONS EMULATIONS LINEPRINTER HP GL C EMULATIONS iy HP PCL 5C Fig 4 7 Emulations Submenu Administration Emulations PostScript Within the Emulations PostScript menu are a PostScript Emulation Level option a Default Halftone option a Default CRD Color 4 28 Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Rendering Dictionary option a Default Dithering option and a Gamma Correction option Default Halftone Emulation Level Default CRD Color Rendering Dictionary Default Dithering This option allows you to choose a printer default halftone from the following settings 106 screen lines per inch x 45 screen angles 71 lpi x 45 80 lpi x 45 53 Ipi x 45 and the factory default Enhanced setting The Enhanced setting gives the best results for most jobs especially jobs containing a mixture of text graphics or sampled images See chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output for information about the halftone settings and their uses NOTE If you choose halftones settings such as line frequencies or spot functions in your application those settings probably take precedence over the halftones in the Default Halftone menu This option allows you to choose either PostScript Level 1 emulation or PostScript Level 2 emulation as your printer s
28. 4 es ex E netus 4 18 Orientation menu ssl Ledo 4 18 Origin HP GL sss esses 4 32 OUT OF OIL suueses esses 6 12 OUTER JAM ssss 9 3 9 14 Output tray Capacity sucer e Gales B 6 Medialevels gus esa saias ds GAS 6 26 Output collating eus onnenn 5 12 Outputbin naming 4 48 I 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 P Packing materials in printer 2 6 Page Description Languages See Emulations Pantone POCE 00 7 13 Pantone Professional Color Toolkit 7 16 PANTONE Colors 1 8 Papers a Ta vertens OM acs E B 5 CaSSette 25 255 vesc edam eerte dee 4 6 Envelopes rii aa AA te ia 5 8 Filling cassette 2 38 Imageable region B 5 TASER EE OE E EAN 1 11 5 11 Laser Printsess eee ys 5 11 Loading 5 cte 2 41 5 2 5 5 Lower cassette 1 13 8 1 Margins ls sexe bee PER EOS B 5 Media menu 4 6 4 17 See Paper jams Plan dS oso eeu ess 1 10 5 11 Selection 4 6 4 17 5 11 SIZES 4 ideo e E E US 1 10 B 5 Stora eis Fo 34 acca eO TDI B 6 PY peSs 44 Stes fale SLE Y Senes 1 10 5 11 Paper cassette Capacity ca cues ea UReA nu v ea B 6 Filling x55 eerste a oa 2 38 Paper exit plates cleaning 6 37 Paper exit rollers cleaning 6 37 Paper feed cassette See Paper cassette Paper jams Error recovery sls esses 9 17
29. ASCII hex protocol Data is sent and received in ASCII format This mode is recommended if you do not print binary data It was designed for data in the printable ASCII range Print jobs can alter the PS protocol value through PostScript operators Normal Enables standard ASCII hex protocol Print jobs can Fixed not alter this value through PostScript operators QBinary Quoted Binary Enables binary communications protocol Print jobs can alter this value through PostScript operators Data in the printable ASCII range also prints Use the special quoting mechanism for the special characters and D EOF QBinary Quoted Binary Fixed Enables binary communications Fixed protocol Print jobs can not alter this value through PostScript operators Data in the printable ASCII range also prints Use the special quoting mechanism for the special characters and D EOF Binary Enables binary communications protocol Print jobs can alter this value through PostScript operators Data in the printable ASCII range also prints D 12 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Binary Enables binary communications protocol Print jobs Fixed can not alter this value through PostScript operators Data in the printable ASCII range also prints A data stream sent through the serial or parallel interface using Binary would be treated the same as a data stream sent through the optional network in
30. B 2 Remote eo hdd bd he SURE UN B 2 PPD Piles au elhipretesies 3 7 3 8 Pre charger unit cleaning 6 31 Pre printed media Prin ng on oec eR eS 5 8 Pressure release pin 2 34 6 11 Pressure release pieces Moving the printer 6 22 Removing 2 20 6 22 Replacing 000 6 22 Previous key 000 005 4 6 Print density Adjustment 00 5 15 Transparencies 00 9 33 Print engine onte penra eera tad nre ee B 1 D ty cycle neiaa AGAR Bere aes B 2 Notselevel eee RIA B 2 Print method usske dire Res B 1 Resolution 00 1 8 B 1 Speed petsona s petari ale adele wid B 2 Warm up time 000 B 2 Print quality 100K checkup 00 9 4 Blurry images 9 31 Darkrai ok ates ae Red 9 28 9 30 Dark vertical lines 9 32 Density AA 9 28 Index FUSE ases E PA A ed Hates 9 4 Gamma correction 4 30 Laght icut AA 9 28 9 30 Media storage 5 11 Registration sls esee 9 32 Scratches sass eR A AA neRERESRY 9 31 Sharp horizontal lines 9 33 Smudges iusso aie See wwe ged 9532 Specific problems 9 28 Troubleshooting 9 28 Marlabl s d Oe often wate eb 7 6 White lines z 2 2 eurer ohne 9 30 Print Status cse one IIS 4 37 Print Status option 4 37
31. DTR Data Terminal Ready on or off factory default on RTS Request to Send on or off factory default off and CTS Clear to Send on or off the factory default is off This option sets the binary communications protocol BCP for communicating over a serial parallel or optional network interface to a PostScript printer BCP allows any 8 bit binary value 0 255 to be treated as data while allowing a few of the values to function as special control characters Four choices are available through the PS Protocol submenu for the serial interface The default is normal Normal Enables standard ASCII hex protocol Data is sent and received in ASCII format Print jobs can alter this value through PostScript operators Normal Fixed Enables standard ASCII hex protocol Print jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript operators BinaryEnables binary communications protocol BCP Print jobs can alter this value through PostScript operators Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Binary Fixed Enables binary communications protocol BCP Print jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript operators When PS Protocol is set to the normal fixed or binary fixed mode and a print job sends PostScript operators to change the input device mode the operators are accepted but not acted upon See appendix D Additional Technical Information for more information on
32. Index Screen printing au aa 1 11 Screendumps 0005 1 11 SCSI See Disk Security card 1 11 8 13 Select key d lacado A ub voee 4 6 Serial interface 4 22 B 2 Cable pinouts B 12 Data bisce pa AA SR 4 24 Emulation leere yee 4 22 End job mode 4 23 Flow control 4 23 4 24 Hdwe Flow CTL 4 24 Ignore parity usua 4 23 Min K Spool ssssss 4 23 Moderna banne see e bp OPES 4 22 Panty ii ce bo es 4 23 PS protocol secretin ideta 4 24 Rev Sw Flow CU 4 23 Sett ngs e i teer as nne e neue 3 20 Spool timeout uses 4 23 SLOP HS 5o ud AA EE divin es eters 4 24 Test fileres d mut a bia nE S 3 19 T es ngx AT ea dea mer npe ea 3 19 Troubleshooting 3 19 Xmit Sw Flow Ctl 4 24 Service International 00 A 4 United States 00 A 3 Sith a kG hs repetens A 3 Service call Messages Lesser ote px Fen EN EUN 9 4 Placing a s enses ex oe Ets 9 34 Setup printer Using menus 3 20 Sheet feeder Installing ss n Ep EAE 8 1 Media De Pata tade Hewes 8 1 Shipment Contents Loser AA ARA hes 2 4 Damage dorna vro Rr NI e 2 4 Missing parts ssl esses 2 4 Shipping spacers 00 2 10 showpage operator PostScript 3 17 3 19 SIDE PANEL OPEN 9 3 SIMMS t ust wa tex leet neater 8 22 Caution i
33. MOTI ALC A s sce prec UU shen ERN B 12 IBM PC XT PC AT and Compatible Computers B 12 Centronics Parallel 2 0005 B 13 Notes to the Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table 0 B 14 1284 Parallel et B 15 Dataproducts Parallel 2 04 B 16 viii EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix C Appendix D Notices FCC Compliance 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee C 1 Canadian Users 000 e eee eee eee C 1 Vfg 1046 1984 Conformity Statement C 2 Bescheinigung des Herstellers Importeurs C 2 Declaration of Manufacturer Importer C 2 Electronics Emissions 0 000 C 2 Laser Safety vr e Do a TUA SERE C 3 Proprietary Statement 004 C 3 Copyright Notice 0 0 eere C 3 Manual Notice 002 cee eee eee C 3 Colophon REPE E URL eas C 4 Additional Technical Information Introduction un ee ee eee eee eee D 1 How Your Printer Works su ue ee ee D 1 Memory pu RE eden eae D 3 Memory Management ouuo ee D 3 The Memory Clents usua ee e ee ao D 4 Frame Butter 3s on dA A TA eee es D S PostScript Heap a es Ada eee ee D S Spool Buffers 0 0 0 ee cee eee ee eee D 5 PostScript Font Cache 04 D 6 Binulation 34 eL ARE DR Rs D 6 Temporary Emulation 0 D 7 Display List o eite Ris D 8 Disk Cache i ui
34. Program Manager s Main window and double click the appropriate disk drive icon the drive the Windows disk is in at the top of the File Manager window 3 14 Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 10 11 12 13 14 Chapter 3 Drag the QSCRIPT HLP file from the QMS disk to the WINDOWS SYSTEM directory Open the Windows Control Panel and double click the Printers icon The Control Panel icon is usually located in Program Manager s Main window In the Printers dialog box choose the Add button From the List of Printers that appears choose Install Unlisted or Updated Printer and choose the Install button In the text box that appears type the name of the floppy drive for example A the Windows disk is in and choose OK In the Add Unlisted or Updated Printer dialog box select QMS PostScript Printer and choose OK If you see the following message Insert Microsoft Windows 3 1 Disk 5 or a disk with the updated SSERIFF FON file in choose the Cancel button Choose the Connect button to configure your printer port In the Connect dialog box select the appropriate host port in the Ports list and choose OK Choose the Setup button and in the Printers section of the dialog box that appears choose your printer magicolor LX Choose OK to return to the Printers dialog box Choose Set As Default Printer to make the QMS printer the default printer
35. Qutof olli secun A 6 12 Q ter Jam 5 5 50 sense ph ue ere ern 9 3 Printing status ousa ao 9 3 Printing t st i 2 css os ette ph 9 3 Put paper in osse deter 9 3 Replace belt 6 10 9 3 Replace fuser rss 2 e nre 9 4 Side panel open 9 3 Toner empty 0 00 eee 6 4 Top cover open sess 9 3 Troubleshooting 9 20 Waiting on input 9 4 Warmingup ee ae ea 9 4 X active jobs edhe cele we delay ERR 9 1 X toner cartridge empty 6 4 9 3 Status page Printing ote onse e ERE 4 37 Troubleshooting 9 20 Status Page Type option 4 39 Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 StOp Dits ea aia A beg asthe 3 20 Serial interface au edo 4 24 Storage Consumables 005 B 6 Labels AA AA t bus B 6 M dias iP heute o dak ns 5 11 Paper so die bp m POE B 6 Pressure release pieces 6 22 Transparencies suso B 6 Supplies See Consumables SUDDOEt S cd oly se Decco yndee ON I eR dier A 1 CompuServe ua ba te nr b RS Ee A 2 International A 4 QMS bulletin board A 1 Te chiucal ii oc dosh ponen A 2 United States A 3 A 4 Switches Enge oc ides ope E a thes B 2 Mait cos och deba beta t EGER 2 44 Remote c Tr ARAS SEU HS SA 2 44 Symbol 5 atu docks E v Maco al alias 7 19 System administrator G 4 System
36. Start up page 000 9 24 Status message 4 9 20 Status page 0 2 0 ess 9 20 Top cover open usua eo 9 3 Transparencies eus ea 9 18 Wite emor ps else eee EA Ad overs 8 44 X ACTIVE JOBS 9 1 Typefaces cat AA pod ie ates B 2 Avant Garde ee 7 18 Bookman srecne uii Pan ALTA e eee 7 18 Card AA A oc rp eds 8 11 COUFIGE is oo AA pe Fete etn 7 18 Helvetica sna wie i wire n ERAS 7 18 Helvetica Condensed 7 19 Helvetica Narrow 7 18 7 19 FAP PGT osean Mee ENO 7 20 ITC Zapf Chancery 7 19 ITC Zapf Dingbats 7 19 New Century Schoolbook 7 18 Resident A ea whe nre 7 18 SYMBOL oo eorr nieni heals 7 19 uunc cr 7 18 Unpacking i52 TADE RR 2 6 Upgrades installing 1 8 8 51 US National Service A 3 Utilities See PS Executive Series Utilities V Vendors SIMMSz IURE DERI Ox B 9 Ventura Publisher C 4 Windows version eus eo 7 3 Vertical lines Darky icy eed rr aS 9 32 Vfg 1046 1984 conformity C 2 Virtual memory D 5 D 9 See K Mem for PS Heap Voltage Mee e EN NN p POT OUR 2 3 Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 W WAITING ON INPUT 9 4 Warm up time 0 eae B 2 WARMING UP 000000 9 4 Warnings In manuals A iir eds 1 6 POWEL secs ot SF acy Ssh d WAGs Relea E 2 45 Warran
37. Technical Specifications Make sure print media is not torn folded or wrinkled Do not overfill the media cassette it holds 250 sheets of paper 50 transparencies or label stock up to the upper limit mark on the cassette NOTE If the printer is operating in a low humidity environment we recommend printing fewer than 20 consecutive transparencies to prevent jamming If you have problems with double feeding remove the paper from the cassette and fan the edges The sheets may be sticking together However do not fan transparencies this can create electrostatic buildup that can cause jamming Store print media away from moisture and humidity Moisture and humidity may cause media to turn up at the edges or wrinkles to occur The recommended relative humidity during operation is 60 70 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 m Load media printing side up top edge first The printing side of media is indicated on the wrapping so leave it in its wrapping until you are ready to load it B Keep the paper feed rollers and the manual feed belts clean Dirty rollers and belts can draw media unevenly into the printer See Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller and the Manual Feed Belts in chapter 6 Consumables and Preventive Maintenance Preventing Envelope Jams To prevent envelope jams W Keep envelopes in their original box to protect them until they re used Don t use
38. When the printer is off line pressing this key Printer Configuration 4 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Menu once brings it back on line When the printer is on line ready to accept and process new print jobs the Online LED on the control panel is illuminated The Tray Select key allows you to select the cassette from which to draw print media the standard upper cassette the optional lower cassette or the manual feed tray The appropriate LED is illuminated to confirm your choice The Media key is used to tell the printer whether paper or transparencies are in the currently selected cassette The factory default for both upper and lower cassettes is paper The Cancel key allows you to cancel the oldest job s compiling or printing in the printer or to send an end of job indicator for a print job This key can be used without taking the printer off line See Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs in chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for more details NOTE If you accidentally press the Cancel key press the Menu key to tell the printer to stop cancelling a job Press the Menu key after the printer goes off line to enter the Configuration menu In addition pressing the Menu key returns you to the next higher menu level allowing you to back out of the Configuration menu one level at a time tells the printer to stop cancelling a job when you accident
39. You can purchase an envelope cassette from your QMS vendor The envelope cassette holds up to 30 24 Ib 90 g m DL and Com 10 envelopes It fits in the slot for the standard or the optional media tray but we recommend it be used in the standard slot To use the envelope cassette 1 Remove the paper cassette from the printer fig 8 4 Fig 8 4 Remove the Paper Cassette Printer Options amp 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 2 On the envelope cassette set the back and side envelope stackers figs 8 5 and 8 6 to the correct envelope size 1 Fig 8 5 Set the side stackers Fig 8 6 Set the rear stacker 8 6 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 3 Settheenvelope size key to the correct envelope size fig 8 7 Fig 8 7 Set the size key Printer Options 8 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 4 Lift the stacker arm and load 30 or fewer envelopes printing side up so that the flap side will be on the left when the envelope is pulled into the printer fig 8 8 Yi JA Fig 8 8
40. and the first submenu Mode displays You scroll to the Emulation menu You enter the Emulation menu and the first option ESP displays You scroll to the PostScript option You select the PostScript option After three seconds you are returned to your previous position in the Parallel menu You return to the top level menu You scroll to the Yes option You save your changes You put the printer on lline Table 4 1 Selecting a Configuration Option Printer Configuration Chapter 4 Message Window OFFLINE CON FIGURATION OPERATOR CONTROL CON ADM ADM FIGURATION INISTRATION INISTRATION COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICAT TIMEOUTS COMMUNICAT SERIAL COMMUNICAT ONS PARALLEL PARALLEL MODE PARALLEL EMU EMU ESP EMU LATION LATION LATION POSTSCRIPT POSTSCRIPT IS SELECTED PARALLEL EMU LATION SAVE CHANGES NO SAVE CHANGES YES IDLE EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Entering Alphanumeric Values In some submenus you choose options by entering an alphanumeric string instead of by selecting from a list Entering alphanumeric values through the control panel is similar to setting the time and date on a digital watch You enter the information one character at a time To change alphanumeric values in the Configuration menu m Use the Next key to scroll forward through the list of a
41. either 7 bits or 8 bits transmitted per character The factory defaultis 8 data bits This option enables or disables data stream sensing for end of document EOD terminator strings These sequences allow host computers to enforce print job sequencing without considerations for interacting timeouts The values are none printer recognizes only the PostScript D command QMS EOD EndOfDocument and HP EOD lt ESC gt 12345X The factory default is none See Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs in chapter 5 for more details This option sets the binary communications protocol BCP for communicating over a serial parallel or optional network interface to a PostScript printer Choices for the parallel interface are normal normal fixed binary and binary fixed The default is normal Descriptions of these options are in Administration Communications Serial earlier in this section Administration Communications A ppleTalk This option allows you to configure printer host computer communications when using the AppleTalk interface Mode Connection Mode enables or disables the PostScript emulation interactive mode from the host The default is enabled If disabled the printer accepts no jobs through this protocol Connection allows you to enable or disable print spooling The options are Conventional and Spool Conventional the factory default option allows one AppleTalk connection and accepts only one print job
42. fig 6 21 8 Use the damp cloth the wipe the belts Advance the belts so that the entire surface is cleaned 9 Slide the manual feed platform back into place Push it back into the printer until itis secure 10 If you have the optional 250 sheet feeder installed repeat steps 2 through 4 for that cassette 11 Replace the media cassette 12 Replace the cables you removed in step 1 and replace the power cord Cleaning the Exterior of Your Printer At times it may be necessary to clean the outside of your printer Be sure read all of this section before cleaning your printer UEN Remove the printer s power cord from the power outlet before cleaning or an injury may result Neun Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose bevor Sie den Drucker reinigen To protect your printer and to maintain its appearance make sure you use the following guidelines m Use only mild household cleaning solutions that do not contain alcohol or solvents E Use only a dry or slightly damp lint free cloth Never use sharp or rough implements such as wire or plastic cleaning pads Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 41 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 m Always spray the cleaning solution on a cloth not directly on the printer W Always test the solution on a small area of your printer to check the solution s performance W After cleaning allow all parts to dry before closing the p
43. information This manual is contained on a disk The README file on the disk explains how to access the manual Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 E HPPCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference This document covers the HP PCL 5 emulation In most cases only advanced PCL 5 users and system administrators need this information B QMS Crown Technical Reference This document provides advanced technical information including information on communication protocols HP GL emulation HP PCL emulation CCITT and PostScript emulation In most cases only advanced users and system administrators need this information This manual is contained on a disk The README file on the disk explains how to access the manual Other Documentation Other sources of information you may find helpful are E HPPCL 5C Technical Support Notes These notes cover the HP PCL 5C color commands They are available free through CompuServe the QMS bulletin board and Q FAX Appendix A QMS Customer Support of this document explains how to use these services W Printer Option Documentation If you purchased a printer option for example a direct network interface card you may have received separate documentation for it Check chapter 8 Printer Options of this manual for additional option information E Electronic Information CompuServe the Internet our bulletin board and Q FAX are all sources o
44. s Default Screen under the Screens option This allows your choices in the QMS driver to take effect Installing Printer Description Files If you plan to print from Adobe Separator Aldus PageMaker Aldus FreeHand Aldus PrePrint or QuarkXPress install the appropriate printer description file PPD PDX and or PDF as described below NOTE The application should be installed before you install the printer description file s 1 Ifyou haven t already follow the instructions given above in Installing the Printer Utilities 2 Install the appropriate printer description file s for your application from the Drivers folder in the PS Exec folder If you use Adobe Separator install the PPD file Your Separator documentation explains where to put it If you use Aldus PageMaker 5 x install the version 4 1 PPD in the Printer Descriptions folder If you use Aldus PageMaker 4 x install the version 3 0 PPD and PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System Folder If you use Aldus FreeHand 4 x install the version 4 1 PPD in the Printer Descriptions folder Connecting the Printer 3 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 If you use Aldus FreeHand 3 x install the version 3 0 PPD and PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System Folder If you use Aldus PrePrint install the version 3 0 PPD and PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the S
45. t interrupt the reor ganization because all files on the disk might be lost Administration Disk Operations Install Option The Install Option command is used to add options such as fonts and emulations to the hard disk See Installing an Optional Card Font or Emulation in chapter 8 for more details Administration Disk Operations Remove Option The Remove Option command is used in removing options previously installed on the hard disk Selecting this option removes all the files that are a part of the option See Removing an Optional Card Font or Emulation in chapter 8 for more details Administration Disk Operations Format Disk The Format Disk command is used to format a hard disk Ifthe FORMAT FAILED message displays in the message window during the Format Disk operation the disk cannot be used Press the Menu key to remove the message and contact your QMS vendor See Formatting the Internal Hard Disk and Formatting an External Hard Disk in chapter 8 for more details Administration Disk Operations Spool Overflow The Spool Overflow submenu allows you to specify which disk and how much disk space is to be used to spool print jobs when the job cannot be accommodated by RAM Memory for spool buffers is defined in the K Mem for Spool menu option in the Administration Memory menu which is explained earlier in this Printer Configuration 4 53 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 963335
46. 6 18 Clean the Register Rollers 6 36 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Close the transfer unit fig 6 19 Fig 6 19 Close the Transfer Unit 5 Close the back cover Cleaning the Paper Exit Rollers and Plates Clean the paper rollers and plates every 20 000 copies or 12 months whichever comes first This is roughly the same time schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the register and transfer rollers so you may want to do all of these procedures now too All you need for this procedure are 2 or 3 pieces of dry lint free cotton cloth To clean the paper exit roller 1 Open the paper exit unit fig 2 13 2 Use a dry lint free cotton cloth and gentle pressure to clean the paper exit rollers and plates fig 6 20 Turn the coupling Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 37 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 gear on the left end of the fuser unit to access all sides of the rollers Fig 6 20 Clean the Fuser Exit Rollers 3 Close the paper exit unit Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller and the Manual Feed Belts Clean the paper feed roller and the manual feed belts every 20 000 copies or 12 months whichever comes first to prevent misfeeds and jams This is roughly the same time schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the other rollers so you may want to
47. 8 Printer Options Then return to chapter 3 Connecting the Printer to finish setting up your printer Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Connecting the Printer Chapter highlights W Connecting to a network E Connecting to a Macintosh W Connecting to a PC a About printer communication modes EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Introduction This chapter explains how to connect your printer to a host computer after you have set it up according to the instructions in the previous chapter Initial Printer Setup Connecting to a Network If you ve purchased a network interface for your printer see chapter 8 Printer Options for installation information and see your network and your interface kit documentation for further details About Macintosh Networks If you re connecting to a print network such as TOPS or AppleShare using LocalTalk type connectors and boxes see your Macintosh and network documentation for details specific to your setup All Macintosh users on a network must use the same version of LaserWriter to run correctly For example if the network has a mixture of LaserWriter 7 0 and 8 x it will experience frequent reinitialization problems Also to get color output you must use LaserWriter and Laser Prep 6 0 or higher
48. 8 1 Media jams 00 9 18 DCIECE ARA cs ett OA AA A gode 4 6 Cautions External hard disks 4 53 In manual ea nea ATA aE E 1 6 CCITT Memory oorarts eee ERR 4 44 Printing problems 4 44 Technical reference 1 5 Center image See Alignment See Image alignment Centronics parallel cable pinouts 00 B 13 Chain Inputbin menu 4 19 Chaining iter enne 4 19 Change Printer Name Error message 0005 3 4 Changes default Permanent oe on Goi dine EE 4 50 Preventing ios euer heals 4 50 Changing media sizes 4 19 Charger uiterse nnr noiesa 6 27 Cleaning yen crest Dts na EE 6 27 Grid plate 2 0 2 eee 6 30 Latches 2e reo G GRE nen hys 6 29 CHECK WASTE TONER 6 14 9 1 CIB AA A nated ete E EA ea 7 14 Cleaning Charger uniti orromra deiae yei 6 27 Cleaning solutions 6 41 Exterior dimesso depote eles 6 41 Manual feed belts 6 38 Paper exit plates 6 37 6 41 Paper exit rollers 6 37 Paper feed roller 6 38 Pre charger unit 6 31 Prnter normasi Deri Pre dialed ey 6 25 Register roller unit 6 34 Cleaning pad Installing eb pO EET 2 24 Replacing sent nere n 6 4 When to replace 0 6 12 Cleaning Printer 6 1 Clear warning 4 4 4 48 In
49. 8 14 Tilt the SIMM Back and Remove It Printer Options amp 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 6 Remove the new SIMM from the anti static bag 7 Hold the new SIMM at a 45 angle with the notch on the right hand side fig 8 15 Insert the bottom edge of the new SIMM into an open connector O 45 NOTCH Fig 8 15 Insert the SIMM into the Connector 8 24 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 8 Gently pull the SIMM forward to a 90 angle until you feel it fit into place fig 8 16 behind the clips on either side of the connector You may need to use your fingers to open these clips When seated the SIMM stands upright firmly in place CAUTION If you cannot easily fit the SIMM into place do not force it Reposition it making sure that the bottom of the SIMM is seated completely in the connector If there s not enough room between SIMMs to properly tilt and insert the new ones first remove all the SIMMs install the new ones then re install the old ones Steps 4 and 5 above explain how to remove SIMMs Fig 8 16 Pull the SIMM Forward into Position 9 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to follow the directions for eliminating electrostatic buildup NOTE You may want to print out an advanced status page Administration Special Pages submenu so you have a
50. Crown family of products this modular portable architecture provides advanced features as well as the capability to easily integrate new features as they become available A QMS Crown printer can process and print jobs simultaneously instead of sequentially multi task because of advanced memory management techniques such as simultaneous interfacing input buffering job spooling emulation sensing processing compile ahead technology and compressed data formats Default The values or settings built in to a system or program The default settings in this printer can be changed See also factory default Emulation The ability of the printer to respond to commands that are intended for a different type of printer For example when the printer is set for PostScript Level 2 emulation it responds to the same commands that a PostScript Level 2 printer does Engine The non intelligent part of a printer where the paper is physically processed and printed ESP Technology Emulation Sensing Processor Technology technology that uses a form of artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data from any of the printer s interfaces ESP technology which works with most popular commercially available applications selects the appropriate printer Glossary G 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 emulation from those installed on the printer and processes the print job freeing the user from having to change printer switc
51. Default option in the Administration Emulations menu is set to PCLS the factory default Troubleshooting 9 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 If you continue to have problems with the ESP mode selecting printer emulation contact your QMS vendor IBM PC and Compatible Computer Checklist If you are experiencing problems with printing from a PC not related to print quality check the following Does your application setup match the printer interface settings Have you set up your printer port at the system level DOS and installed a color PostScript driver within your application Refer to your DOS Windows and application documentation Do you need an end of job for the previous job If you are using a serial interface are you experiencing a protocol problem Set the printer to DTR DSR protocol If that does not work check your serial interface cable You may also want to try setting the printer to XON XOFF protocol Does your application support color PostScript Level 2 Check the application manual If your application supports color PostScript Level 1 but not Level 2 try setting the printer to Level 1 in the Administration Emulations PostScript Emulation Level menu Apple Macintosh Checklist If you are experiencing problems with printing from a Macintosh not related to print quality check the following Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg te
52. Disk Management In addition to your printer s internal hard disk you can connect up to six external hard disks to your printer via the SCSI port These hard disks serve as secondary storage places for such items as downloaded fonts emulations and spooled data Once you have a hard disk installed on your printer it has virtual memory capabilities for spooling overflow which is an extension of the spool memory client Additional Technical Information D 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Spooling Overflow The spool overflow option Administration Disk Operations menu specifies the maximum space reserved for spooling overflow on the hard disk if one is available When a print job is sent to your printer a portion of that job is stored in the spooling buffer Administration Memory K Mem for Spool menu while the rest of the job is being printed If all the memory in the spooling buffer is being used and the spool overflow option is enabled the printer stores the overflow from the spooling buffer in a reserved area of the hard disk Even if you have a hard disk you should allocate as much RAM to the spool buffer as possible for increased throughput Reserving a 10 20 MB portion of the hard disk for spooling overflow works well for most printing environments If too much of the disk is dedicated to spooling the printer s performance might actually be hindered because the printer tries to fil
53. Guide for information on using the configuration menu Installing System Software from a PC toa Functional Printer 1 Make sure you have PS Executive Series printer utilities provided on a disk with your printer installed on your PC Installation instructions are in the README file on the PS Exec disk 2 Make sure the printer is on and that the system software is functioning normally IDLE appears in the message window If the system software is not functioning see Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC to a Non Functional Printer below 3 Insert the System Software DOS disk provided with your printer into your PC s floppy disk drive Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 4 At the DOS C prompt type the following commands to extract the system software file to your PC s hard disk NOTE This file takes up about 2 5 MB of disk space when extracted md Nqmssys cd qmssyse a system l If the system software disk is in another floppy disk drive substitute the name of that drive for a 5 At the DOS CAQMSSYS prompt type the following command to make sure the SYSTEM DL file is in the QMSSYS directory cl 6 Start PS Exec 7 Choose Download System Code from the PS Exec File menu The Download System Code dialog box appears 8 In the Download System Code dialog box find and select SYSTEM DL 9 Choose the Send button to start
54. HP GL Lineprinter and Hexdump Optional Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 emulations like LNO3 Plus and CCITT appear only if installed The factory default emulation is ESP Min K Spool The minimum amount of RAM KB dedicated to the serial interface Do not set this value greater than K Mem for Spool The default is 00015 Spool Timeout The number of seconds the interface waits for data from the host system before terminating a print job The minimum value is 00000 no timeout the maximum value is 99999 and the factory default value is 00030 End Job Mode This option enables or disables data stream sensing for end of document EOD terminator strings These sequences allow host computers to enforce print job sequencing without considerations for interacting timeouts The values are none printer recognizes only the PostScript D command QMS EOD EndOfDocument and HP EOD lt ESC gt 12345X The factory default is none See Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs in chapter 5 for more details Baud Rate The baud rate is a measure of the rate of transmission bits per second from host to printer over the serial channel The baud rate options are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 The factory default is 9600 Host and printer baud rates must match Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require either RTS or CTS hardware flow control Hdwe Flow Ctl The
55. If you have an Energy Star version of the printer look for a label with the Energy Star logo on the back of the printer Energy Saver causes printer power consumption to drop to less than 45 W If you don t have the Energy Star version of the printer then Energy Saver causes printer power consumption to drop to about 147 W When a print job is received the printer returns to normal power in about 90 seconds NOTE The addition of some optional interfaces in some combinations may cause the product to become non Energy Star compliant Printer Configuration 4 49 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous menu fig 4 12 allows you to restore factory defaults protect current defaults and choose a message window language ADMINISTRATION MISCELLANEOUS Select p Previous Pu Next J MISCELLANEOUS x RESTORE DEFAULTS MISCELLANEOUS MISCELLANEOUS KEYPAD LANGUAGE PERMANENT CHANGE Fig 4 12 Miscellaneous Submenu Administration Miscellaneous Restore Defaults This option allows you to reset all configuration values to their original factory defaults The choices are yes and no the factory default is no During this process which takes several minutes to complete the printer reinitializes itself If the Configuration menu locks up and you cannot access this option you can reset all confi
56. Job Resolution Adjusting Print Density Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs Cancelling a Print Job 04 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 Sending an End of Job Indicator Diagnostic and Special Pages The Start up Page asu ua ee ee The Status Pages ua ua e ee edo The Sample Page ue ee ee ee The Registration Page una ee e eo Header and Trailer Pages usua Introduction A a E eee eee ee Storing and Handling Consumables Storing Consumables 004 Handling Consumables 0 Replacing Consumables 0 005 Replacing a Toner Cartridge Replacing a Developer Cartridge Replacing the OPC Belt Cartridge Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle Replacing the Waste Toner Pack Moving the Printer ua ee e ee Removing the Fuser Unit and Oil Bottle Removing and Replacing Pressure Release Pieces 0 0005 Preventative Maintenance General Tips for Extending Printer Life Cleaning the Printer 000 Cleaning the Charger Unit Cleaning the Pre Charger Unit Cleaning Register and Transfer Rollers Cleaning the Paper Exit Rollers and Plates Cleaning the Pap
57. Load the envelopes 5 Lower the stacker arm 6 6 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 6 Slide the envelope cassette into the printer fig 8 9 Fig 8 9 Slide the cassette into the printer 7 Make sure you select the correct envelope size through your driver when printing Printer Options amp 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Font and Emulation Cards You can purchase cards containing emulations or fonts notresident on the printer The printer can support two cards at once either two font cards or a font and an emulation card Fonts and emulation cards may go in either of the two slots located on the front of the printer below the control panel For a complete list of currently available cards contact your QMS vendor CAUTION Usually the printer must be off line before you insert or remove a card Press the Online Offline key to turn the LED off If you forget to take the printer off line turn the printer power off and back on to regain access to the printer s resident fonts and the data stored in the printer s memory However before installing or removing the LNO3 Plus or the ProCollection font card you must turn off your printer rather than just take it off line Then turn the printer back on after you finish Using Font and Emulation Cards Use the following procedure to install a font or emula
58. Next key to display DISK OPERATIONS REMOVE OPTION 4 Press the Select key to enter the Remove Option submenu Press the Next key until the address ofthe hard disk containing the optional font or emulation displays in the message window then press the Select key 5 When you are prompted insert the card into the card slot The printer compares the contents of the disk with the contents of the card and deletes the matching files from the hard disk 6 When the file removal process is complete press the Menu key to exit the menu 7 To remove the card use the following procedure a If you are removing an LNO3 Plus or a ProCollection card turn off the printer Otherwise make sure the printer is off line use the Online Offline key to turn off the LED b Pull the card out gently c Turnon the printer if it s off and put it back on line Printer Options 6 49 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Formatting the Internal Hard Disk If you experience unexplained or erratic problems with the internal hard disk you may want to reformat the hard disk and reload the print system software NOTE If you reformat the internal hard disk all files on that disk are erased and the system software and fonts must be reloaded To format the internal hard disk follow these instructions 1 Turnoff the printer and then on again The following message displays in the wi
59. Options 6 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press Select then specify the password See the section Entering Alphanumeric Values in chapter 4 Printer Configuration for detailed instructions for entering alphanumeric values When you have entered the complete password press the Select key This saves the password and returns you to the Installation menu To turn on the Password option press the Next key to display the message INSTALLATION USE ADMIN PWD Press Select to enter this submenu Press the Next key to display USE ADMIN PWD YES Press Select This returns you to the Installation menu Once the passwords are entered and activated press the Menu key to return to the Main menu The following message is displayed SAVE CHANGES NO Press the Next key to display SAVE CHANGES YES Press Select Remove the security card from the card slot and put the printer back on line Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Once a menu is password protected you cannot enter it or make changes in it until you enter a valid password You know a menu is password protected if ENTER PASSWORD appears on the message window when you try to enter the Configuration menu If you enter an invalid password the me
60. PS Protocol Administration Communications Parallel This option allows you to configure the printer to match the host communications when using the parallel interface Mode Mode allows or disallows the PostScript emulation interactive mode from the host The options are interactive noninteractive and disabled If disabled the printer accepts no jobs through this protocol Interactive mode allows two way communication between the host and the printer Noninteractive is unidirectional communication from the host to the printer only The factory default is noninteractive The printer must be rebooted for a change in this setting to take effect Emulation This option selects the emulation for the printer parallel port The choices available for Emulations are ESP PostScript HP PCL 5C HP GL Lineprinter and Hexdump Optional emulations like LNO3 Plus and CCITT appear only if installed The factory default emulation is ESP Min K Spool The minimum of RAM KB dedicated to the parallel interface Do not set this value greater than K Mem for Spool The default setting is 00015 Spool Timeout The number of seconds the parallel interface waits for data from the host system before terminating a print job from 00000 no timeout to 99999 with a factory default of 00030 Printer Configuration 4 25 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Data Bits End Job Mode PS Protocol The number of data bits
61. System 6 users must also all have the same version of Laser Prep unless they re using LaserWriter 6 1 or higher Check the version number by selecting the LaserWriter icon then holding down the Command key while pressing the letter I The driver version number appears in the Info window Connecting the Printer 3 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Connecting to a Macintosh What You Need To connect your printer to a single Macintosh you need the items shown in the illustration below B Two PhoneNET type transformer boxes You need one with a DIN 8 connector for the printer port and one with the connector required by your Macintosh usually a DIN 8 B RJ11 telephone cable m Terminating resistors probably two If you re replacing a printer already connected to a Macintosh you probably already have this equipment Host Frinter DIN amp Female Port DIN amp Female Port DIN amp Male Connector DIN amp Male Connector e A Z Terminating Resistors Fig 3 1 Macintosh Printer Interface Cables and Port 3 2 Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 NOTE If you re connecting more than one Macintosh to the printer in an AppleTalk network see your PhoneNET and Macintosh documentation for information Making the Connection CAUTION Turn off both the printer and the Macintosh before making the connection 1
62. The cassette in the optional sheet feeder can hold up to 250 sheets which allows you to spend less time refilling cassettes and to use different types of media more conveniently for example you could load transparencies in the standard cassette and plain paper in the sheet feeder s cassette Envelope Cassette You can purchase an envelope cassette from your QMS vendor This cassette holds up to 30 DL or Com 10 envelopes and fits in the standard or optional media cassette slot Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup Chapter highlights Finding a good location for your printer Unpacking your printer Installing the developer and toner Installing the cleaning pad oil bottle and waste toner pack Installing OPC belt cartridge and paper cassette Printing a start up page EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Introduction This chapter explains how to set up the printer for the first time For quick information on replacing print media developer and toner after the initial setup see chapters 5 and 6 Print Media and Daily Operations and Consumables and Preventative Maintenance NOTE We recommend that you have the printer set up by a QMsS authorized technician The instructions in this chapter are provided for people experienced in working with p
63. Then set it aside on a surface that toner residue can t hurt such as on a piece of paper QZ The toner is a highly combustible powder never burn it Also avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around your eyes it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefahr liches und leicht entz ndliches Pulver es darf deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Ber hrung kommen Einatmen oder Ber hrung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden da dies zu Beeintrachtigungen der Atemwege Hautoder Augen reizungen f hren k nnte Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 31 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 2 Grasp the end of the pre charger unit and pull it downward and then straight out of the printer fig 6 14 X Vy Pre Charger Unit Fig 6 14 Remove the Pre Charger from the Printer 6 32 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Insert the wire cleaner into the recess on the pre charger unit and slide the cleaner back and forth as shown in figure 6 15 Fig 6 15 Clean the Pre Charger Unit 4 Clean the inside corners of the pre charger unit with cotton swabs 5 Making sure the pre charger unit aligns on the runners inside the printer slide it back into the printer 6 Reinstall the waste toner pack and close the waste toner cover Co
64. WASTE TONER CLOSE MANUAL FEED TRAY x DEV LOW Troubleshooting This message is displayed until the job is cancelled The waste toner pack is full and needs to be replaced or is not installed properly See Replacing the Waste Toner Pack in chapter 6 for details The manual feed tray is open when a file is being sent to print from another cassette Close the manual feed tray A developer cartridge is running low and needs to be replaced The x is replaced by the color of the developer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 cartridge that needs attention After installing the new cartridge you have to clear this message through the control panel using the Clear Warning option See chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for details on replacing the developer cartridge and Administration Engine in chapter 4 for details on clearing the warning x DEVELOPER A developer cartridge is not installed or installed UNIT MIS INSTALLED FUSER OIL LOW FUSER OIL EMPTY IDLE IDLE INPUT PRINTING INNER JAM incorrectly The x is replaced by the color of the developer unit that needs attention Either install a developer cartridge if one is not present or reinstall the current one correctly See chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for information on replacing the developer cartridge The oil bottle for the fuser unit is running low If you
65. a sample page through the front panel Administration Special Pages menu This page lists the current default halftone settings for the printer and allows you to see the effect of the currently selected default halftone on shades of cyan magenta yellow black blue and green The Registration Page You can print a registration page through the front panel Administration Special Pages menu This page allows you to check color registration placement of each of the process colors on the page You also can print a registration page through PS Executive Series Utilities See the utilities on line documentation for more details and see chapter 9 Troubleshooting for information on troubleshooting registration problems Header and Trailer Pages Header and trailer pages help you monitor individual jobs Think of them as an accounting or tracking system Print Media and Daily Operations 5 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 For example the header or banner page contains the printer name selected interface job identification title submitting computer job owner routing message start time date application used creation time date copyright date version number job submission time job Start time and printer product name logo You can enable a header page through the front panel Administration Special Pages Header Page menu See chapter 4 for details Trailer pages contain the printe
66. an envelope cassette Using font and emulation cards Using a security card Installing Single In line Memory Modules SIMMs Installing a direct network interface Converting the parallel port to Dataproducts Replacing the internal hard disk Internal and external hard disks Loading print system software EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Introduction This chapter discusses installing printer options If your QMS vendor cannot offer these options for your printer see the QMS World wide Offices section in appendix A QMS Customer Support for telephone numbers to call for information The Sheet Feeder The optional sheet feeder holds up to 25O sheets of media which means less operator time spent refilling cassettes It also provides printing flexibility for example you can load laser paper in the standard cassette and plain paper in the sheet feeder s cassette Plus this compact unit fits directly under the printer so it requires no additional desktop space Media and envelope cassettes are interchangeable between the printer and the optional sheet feeder Installing the Sheet Feeder Unpack the sheet feeder and make sure you received the following E Sheet feeder unit E Two small metal brackets E Four large plastic corner brackets NOTE There may be several other pieces with the sheet feeder but they are not r
67. as the amount of physical RAM present in the printer Because the downloaded system software occupies approximately 3 MB the amount of physical RAM required will be 3 MB more than the amount of RAM available to configurable memory clients Printer Configuration 4 45 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Engine ADMINISTRATION ENGINE X Select Previous l Next lt ye ENGINE 3 IMAGE ALIGNMENT ENGINE ENGINE CLEAR WARNING DEFAULT PAPER ENGINE ENGINE OUTPUTBIN NAME DEFAULT RESOLUTION ENGINE ENGINE INPUTBIN 2 NAME PAGE RECOVERY ENGINE ENGINE INPUTBIN 1 NAME MAN FEED TIMEOUT Fig 4 11 Engine Submenu 4 46 Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Engine Image Alignment The Image Alignment option allows you to adjust the horizontal and vertical placement of printed images To check image alignment print a standard status page this option is located in the Administration Special Pages menu When the printer is placing images properly the alignment tickmarks at the lower left of a status page are 0 5 12 7 mm from the left and bottom edges of the page If the tickmarks are off use this option to align the image horizontally and vertically in pixel increments l00 or 08 mm from 000 to 300 pixels 300 pixels 1
68. ata time If two users send print jobs to the printer the workstation belonging to the first user is tied up until the first job has been printed and the workstation belonging to the second user is tied up until both jobs have been printed The Spool option allows multiple AppleTalk connections and accepts spools more than Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 one print job at a time Workstations are not tied up while jobs are printing Min K Spool The minimum amount of RAM KB dedicated to the LocalTalk interface Do not set this value greater than K Mem for Spool The default is 00015 Printer Configuration 4 27 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Communications Network Interface This option allows you to configure printer host communications when using an optional interface card Appendix D of this manual Additional Technical Information contains information about the PS Protocol option See the documentation that came with the interface card for details on other options Administration Emulations NOTE The Emulations menu allows you to customize emulation settings To choose an emulation or ESP for a particular interface see that interface menu in the Administration Communications menu ADMINISTRATION EMULATIONS D un z Select Previous
69. by the two handles one at each end fig 6 6 and lift it up and out of the printer Fig 6 6 Remove the Fuser Unit 6 20 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Align the fuser unit over an appropriate waste container such as an old jar and tilt the unit so the excess oil pours into the container fig 6 7 Then dispose of the oil following safety laws and regulations Fig 6 7 Drain Oil from Fuser Unit 9 Usea clean dry lint free cloth or some cotton swabs to wipe any remaining oil out of the tray 10 Replace the fuser unit 11 Stuff a clean wadded paper towel into the place normally occupied by the oil bottle to act as a cushion and to absorb any residual oil during the move 12 After the move see Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle earlier in this chapter for instructions on reinstalling the oil bottle Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 6 22 Removing and Replacing Pressure Release Pieces The pressure release pieces help relieve the tension on the fuser rollers to protect the roller from accidental damage during a move or prolonged storage They must be installed for the move and removed again before printing Illustrations of many of the steps described in this section are in Removing the Pressure Release Pieces
70. default PostScript emulation This option is useful if you have files prepared in an application that is not fully compatible with Adobe s PostScript Level 2 page description language However Level 2 works for Level 2 files and most Level 1 files The default is PostScript Level 2 emulation For color matching with PostScript Level 2 applications this option allows you to choose from the following color rendering dictionaries Colorimetric 600 Colorimetric 300 Business 600 the factory default Business 300 Photographic 600 and Photographic 600 Since the printer has a different range of colors than other color devices such as your monitor a color rendering dictionary is necessary to tell the printer how to print colors that are out of its range See Printer Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries in chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output for more information on choosing a CRD Additional CRDs may be available from your QMS vendor This option allows you to specify the default dither pattern used by the printer The choices are standard Printer Configuration 4 29 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Gamma Correction enhanced low enhanced medium and enhanced high Standard the factory default setting is PostScript compatible dithering Enhanced dithering reduces the banding sometimes seen in PostScript compatible dithering with enhanced high producing the least banding The f
71. do all of these procedures at the same time You need a lint free cotton cloth lightly dampened with water to perform this procedure To clean the rollers 6 38 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Turn off the printer and remove the power cord and all interface cables 2 Remove the media cassette 3 Reach into the back of the cassette slot and locate the roller it s on the top of the slot at the rear fig 6 21 4 Use the damp cloth the wipe the roller Rotate the roller so that the entire surface is cleaned 5 Locate the manual feed platform it s a black plastic tray at the top of the cassette slot fig 6 21 Rear of Printer Front of Printer Paper Feed Roller Faper Cassette Slot Manual Feed Belts Manual Feed Platform Fig 6 21 Locate the Manual Feed Platform Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 39 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 6 Remove the manual feed platform by lifting it up and forward at the front of the platform until it drops out fig 6 22 Fig 6 22 Remove the Manual Feed Platform 6 40 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Locate the two manual feed belts at the top of the cassette slot
72. failure reload system software 8 51 System memory aus D 9 System software installing 1 8 8 51 G 4 System Use pa pe ee Rr ee D 9 T TGCP IP es TIRE x 1 11 4 28 Technical Notes HP PCL 5C 1 5 Technical Reference 1 5 4 2 B 8 COWON ele Wee E A ERE 4 2 Document Option Commands 4 2 HP PCE S 4m EDI RR 4 2 4 33 HPPCLO9C c uas I RRIERH 4 33 PostScript e renere e Gee 4 2 Temperature Js e eda 2 2 Temporary emulation D 7 Tension release pin 2 34 6 11 Testing PC Parallel port 00 3 17 Serial port sienna A he Ade 3 19 Text files won t print 9 21 THICKStOCK ao vio o eds 5 8 5 11 Media menu ousa ee 4 17 Selection 2 pa ceu RR 4 17 Tickmatks 23 soos eec e Index Timeouts ue are bas eh ba EDEN 4 21 Emulation da eur det Gand goed 4 22 ESP dA UM Ute es sx 4 22 JOD ibi ays e tue ss 4 22 Manual feed o an 4 49 PS Wate er esso pA 4 21 Times cassis den dha aee min pto dade seo e 7 18 Token Ring 1 11 4 28 B 8 Toner Adjusting density 5 15 Contaminating 6 3 Darken ise is ove ie etek RES 5 16 Handling 125531 bob Ed 6 3 Installation 000 2 11 Tightens eren eienn on e 5 16 Measurement 6 4 6 7 B 7 G 3 PLANES oa ARA oerte Rue 6 4 Redistribute usua eo 6 4 Spills ditan dA PATA Shon sens E 6 3 Toner cartridge Consumables 0 4 B 7 E
73. find any part of the shipment missing or damaged contact the shipping company or your QMS vendor immediately Don t return any merchandise to the manufacturer without authorization Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 QMS Product Registration Register your QMS product now In the US call 800 637 8049 to register In other countries see appendix A QMS Customer Support for the appropriate number Initial Printer Setup 2 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Unpacking the Printer The packing materials that protect the printer during shipment must be removed You might want to save the packing materials in case you ever have to move or ship the printer CAUTION You may damage the printer if you turn it on before all packing materials are removed MAUA The printer weighs approximately 106 Ibs 48 kg without consumables Do not attempt to lift it by yourself aec Der Drucker hat ein Gewicht von ungef hr 48 kg Bitte versuchen Sie niemals den Drucker alleine anzuheben oder zu transportieren 1 Remove everything except the printer from the shipping carton fig 2 2 2 With the assistance of another person grasp the printer by the four ridged finger grips two on each side of the printer and lift it out of the carton and remove the plastic wrap fig 2 2 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalbor
74. floppy disk drive Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 8 Type the following command to extract the PCL 5 fonts file to your PC s hard disk a af2pclfnd 9 At the DOS CAQMSSYS prompt type the following command to make sure these files are in the QMSSYS directory SYSTEM DL AF2PSENI DL AF2PSFN2 DL and AF2PCLEN DL dird 10 Turn the printer off and then on again The following message displays in the window OMS SOFTLOAD x x READY TO BOOT 11 Immediately press the Select key before this message disappears When you press the Select key the following message appears in the message window OMS SOFTLOAD x x BOOT SYSTEM NOTE If 10 seconds passes before you press the Select key the IDLE message appears and you must return to step 2 12 Press the Next key until INSTALL TO DISK appears on the second line of the message window QMS SOFTLOAD x x INSTALL TO DISK 13 Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu Then press the Next key until the name of the communication port you re using appears in the second line of the message window for example INSTALL TO DISK PARALLEL Printer Options 8 55 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 14 17 18 19 Press the Selectkey to enter the communication portsubmenu The following appears on the second line of the message window
75. following command print printest psd If prompted for the name of the list device type the name of the serial port you re using at the computer for example comi NOTE If the computer has more than one serial port they re probably labeled If not check the computer documentation for the COM port names If a blank page ejects from the printer the printer and the computer are communicating You are ready to start printing If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly make sure the printer s serial port settings match those of the PC See Checking Serial Communication Settings below Connecting the Printer 3 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Checking Serial Communication Settings If the serial communication test described above doesn t work then make sure your printer s serial port settings baud rate parity data bits and stop bits match those of the PC To find out what the PC s serial settings are look in your AUTOEXEC BAT file in the root directory for a command line like this MODE COM1 9600 N 8 1 P In this example the PC s serial port communication settings are 9600 for baud rate n no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bits The p stands for infinite retry To find out what the printer s serial settings are check the printer s start up page which printed out when you first turned it on It lists the printer s cu
76. have a new bottle on hand you may want to change the bottle now See chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for information on replacing the oil bottle If not order a replacement bottle now A limited number of copies approximately 100 will still run However when the oil runs out the printer stops and the FUSER OIL EMPTY status message appears The oil bottle for the fuser unit is empty The printer will not run anymore copies until the bottle is replaced See chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for information on replacing the oil bottle No jobs are in progress The system is on line and printing previously accepted jobs No new jobs are arriving at the communication interfaces Media has jammed leaving the OPC belt cartridge area Remove the jam see the Inner Jam section later in this chapter for details INITIALIZING The printer is warming up and getting ready to go on line Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 MISFEED JAM OUTER JAM PRINTING STATUS PRINTING TEST PUT xxxxxx PAPER IN xxxxx INPUT BIN REPLACE BELT SIDE PANEL OPEN TOP COVER OPEN x TONER EMPTY Troubleshooting Chapter 9 Media has jammed leaving the media cassette Remove the jam see the Misfeed Jam section later in this chapter for details Media has jammed leaving the paper exit unit Remove the jam see the
77. information Also check to see if application notes tips for printing from specific applications are available for your application from Connecting the Printer 3 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Q FAX the QMS bulletin board or CompuServe Appendix A QMS Customer Support explains how to use these QMS information services Installing the Windows 3 1 Driver NOTE The QMS developed Windows driver supports all the printer s advanced capabilities However if you experience printing problems while using our driver with a particular application or if your application like Aldus PageMaker requires the use of the Microsoft PostScript driver then we recommend using the Microsoft driver along with the QMS WPD file to add printer specific capabilities to the driver In this case the QMS driver for Windows can remain loaded in order to be used for other applications The QMS WPD file is on the Windows Drivers disk shipped with the printer See the README file on the disk for information on using the WPD Install the QMS driver for Windows QSCRIPT DRV using the following procedure 1 Turn on your computer start Windows and insert the QMS Windows Driver disk shipped with your printer into the computer s 3 5 floppy drive 2 In Windows open File Manager and display the contents of the QMS Windows Driver disk Double click the File Manager icon usually located in
78. jam 0 00000 9 14 Papel chitin henebe er cte ERAS 9 18 Preventing 5 11 9 18 9 19 REMOVING ed med eo ee eee E dS 9 6 Transparencies 5 11 9 18 9 19 Media menu Retyonie the been 4 17 Memory Allocating i cessed ay iea 4 42 Configurable 1 10 Downloading fonts 9 25 Host input 0 00000 4 43 Management 0 D 3 PostScript fonts 0 4 43 PostScript heap 4 43 See also RAM SIMMs Spool buffer esses 4 43 Standard oe pU ware on dus B 3 Uperade seek or wis 8 22 B 3 Upgrade Kits ereas pe eien urea as B 9 Martualac aee eatin tts 4 43 D 5 D 9 Memory clients D 3 D 4 Memory management D 3 Memory menu Allocating memory 4 42 K Mem Disk Cache D 8 K MembDisplay D 8 K Mem Emul Tmp D 7 K Mem Emulation D 6 K Mem for PSHeap D 5 K Mem for Spool D 5 K Mem Framebuff D 5 I 10 MB Printer Mem D 9 MENU c se nO RR DA E G 4 8 Administration 0 4 20 Alphanumeric values 4 10 Configuration 04 4 14 Installation o oaae naana 4 15 Levels Da sorei esses 4 14 Operator Control 4 17 Optional features in 4 54 Organization 4 4 14 Sa
79. loose toner from the OPC belt cartridge area in the printer 8 Clean the charger unit by sliding the wire cleaner along the groove in the top of the unit several times then flip the unit over and run the wire cleaner several times across the grid plate a metal screen on the bottom fig 6 13 Wire Cleaner Top of Grid Flate Bottom of Grid Plate Fig 6 13 Clean the Charger Unit 9 Turn the OPC belt cartridge up on the handle end again and place the charger unit back into its slot 10 Swing the three brass latches back over the charger unit to hold it in place 11 Lift the OPC belt cartridge up and swing the green end handle open 12 Holding the cartridge by its handle slide it back into the printer until it snaps in place The cartridge is in place when you can see the green arrows inside the metal frame of the printer 6 30 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 13 Pushthe greenend handle down to lock the cartridge in place 14 Close the manual feed tray Cleaning the Pre Charger Unit Clean the pre charger unit whenever the print quality diminishes To clean this unit you need several cotton cloths and swabs and the wire cleaner located in the OPC belt tray see figure 6 11 for location To clean the pre charger unit 1 Remove the waste toner pack See Replacing the Waste Toner Pack in this chapter
80. message window displays SAVE CHANGES NO h Press the Next key until Yes appears in the message window then press the Select key The following message displays OFFLINE i Pressthe Online Offline key to put the printer back on line The Online LED lights Print Media and Daily Operations 5 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 2 See Manual Feed earlier in this chapter for instructions on feeding media manually to the printer Page Sizes Imageable Regions and Margins Page Sizes Your printer can print on the following media sizes letter legal executive A4 and envelopes DL and COM 10 Appendix B Technical Specifications lists measurements for each of these sizes Imageable Regions and Margins Each size has a certain imageable region the maximum page area the printer can print on The imageable region is subject to hardware limits physical page size and margins required by the printer engine and to software constraints amount of printer memory available As you set page margins in your application remember that they must be equal to or fall inside the printer s imageable region for the page size you re using Appendix B Technical Specifications lists measurements of imageable regions and margins for each media size About Legal Sized Imageable Region There are two imageable regions for legal sized pages one for black and one for co
81. n Eyes 3 2 Direction iecur Ree IER B 14 DISK oie oU v ue resin eR S 1 13 External eed De wis Bie ne bees ties 8 43 Formatting 00 4 53 Identifying cie de eines deca lene ATA 8 45 Internal 6h ret ES 8 52 B 3 Loading emulations 8 43 Loading fonts eu ea 8 43 Location cueste depou ae pea 4 54 SCSI interface B 2 B 3 SCSIport 1 13 3 11 8 43 Disk cach s sis 2st re e iR ea D 8 Disk Cache option See K Mem Disk Cache option Disk location option 4 54 Disk Operations menu 4 52 Collatio tente s 5 12 Collation option 4 54 Format Disk option 4 53 Install Option option 4 53 Installing upgrades 8 51 Location option 4 54 Remove Option option 4 53 Size Meg option 4 54 Spool Overflow option 4 53 D 10 Disk space Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Gollating ua nre woes eee 5 12 Display list 236 ehh uty etek ots D 8 Dithering Printer default style 4 29 Do Error Handler option 4 40 Do Start Page option 4 40 Do Sys Start option 4 40 DOC See Document Option Commands Document Option Commands 4 2 DOCs supported by printer 4 56 Documentation 1 4 B 8 Documentation CompuServe
82. objects that has an ID and attributes symbol set spacing pitch height style weight and typeface number A font is accessed by specifying a desired set of attributes The system selects the font that most closely matches these attributes from the available set of fonts See the PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference Manual for information on what characterizes a PCL font There are two types of fonts bound and unbound A bound font supports a single symbol set An unbound font supports multiple but not all symbol sets With unbound fonts the symbol sets are organized into two groups normal and Dingbats All downloaded fonts are bound and all resident fonts except Zapf Dingbats which supports the Dingbats symbol set support the group of normal symbol sets In the QMS PCL 5 emulation only fonts located in the current resource may be accessed by a PCL font ID using the normal lt ESC gt X sequence All other fonts resident cartridge or other D 14 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D including those stored on the additional resources can be accessed only by attributes Also only objects stored in the current resource may be deleted directly by the PCL language Therefore unless they are explicitly removed external fonts are always available to all PCL jobs Font Index Number In addition to its ID a downloaded font also has an unique index number t
83. off is correct for most ASCII listings printed from UNIX machines PC listings should usually be done with both items set to Off and Macintosh listings usually require the third setting Ifiscrlf Off criscrlf On Note that the FF becomes a CR FF when the LF is a CRLF IncludeFeature linesperinch 7 Purpose Sets the default PCL line spacing The ncludeFeature linesperinch DOC affects PCL s default VMI vertical motion index 1 48 Default 6 IncludeFeature pointsize default font size Purpose Specifies the point size for scalable default font If the selected font is not scalable or if a bitmap font size is specified this setting is ignored default font 0 25 to 999 75 in 0 25 increments Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Glossary For more information about a term check the index listings Application A computer program designed to help people perform a certain type of work for example a word processing program a page layout program a programming language or software that handles graphics and prints documents spreadsheets and or forms Consumables Supplies that are used up like print media toner and developer Crown A proprietary multitasking printer operating system which allows QMS to adapt an advanced software code base to the evolving printing needs of users in many different operating environments As implemented in the QMS
84. or benzene as these can cause discoloration alteration spots on the transfer drum or other problems Use only lint free paper towels cloths or swabs After cleaning allow all parts to dry before closing the printer reattaching the power cord and turning on the power switch Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before reconnecting the power cord and turning on the printer Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter Cleaning the Charger Unit Clean the charger unit whenever the print quality diminishes To clean this unit you need several cotton cloths and swabs and the wire cleaner located in the OPC belt tray see figure 6 11 for location To clean the charger unit 1 Openthe manualfeed tray by lightly pressing on the top right corner fig 6 10 and then tilt the tray out and down Fig 6 10 Open the Manual Feed Tray CAUTION The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights and direct sunlight Limit exposure to 800 lux the average fluores cent lighting in an office of light to under 2 minutes If exposure exceeds this put the belt in a dark place to recover depending on exposure recovery may take up to 2 hours Also handle the OPC belt carefully using either the two green side handles or using the green end handle when possible It is Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 27 EDNord Istedg
85. t sd o wie Ord e 8 22 Electrical specifications B 9 Installing ois 5 esc renes 8 22 I 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Mechanical specifications B 9 See also Memory Part number 000 B 9 See also RAM DIZES os shies AE inked ee aul eg B 9 Specifications 200 B 9 Weatrant o Lever Duro ere B 10 Simultaneous Interface Operation SIO See SIO Single In line Memory Module See SIMMs SIOA Lebe bored e En t n 1 9 CTOWI 2 bue tot gb es 1 9 SIZe Meg Lis sene onn epe er ds 4 54 Sizes Cassette sob nere Dove bre nS 2 39 Media ss Ee obe s 1 10 5 10 B 5 NIE 1 8 8 51 G 4 Smears transparencies 9 33 Smudges 6 sce AA ATA ES SCHEDE OS 9 32 Software Macintosh application 3 8 PG hh Lad elu tattle Latent eek Le 3 13 Space requirements printer 2 3 Special Pages menu 4 37 Header Inputbin option 4 38 Header Page option 4 38 Print Status option 4 37 Registration Page option 4 37 5 21 Sample Page option 4 38 5 21 Status Page Type option 4 39 Trailer Inputbin option 4 39 Trailer Page option 4 39 Spills Developer ser sees neu 6 3 OU zo otim t SR 6 14 6 20 TOODETI 22d vete tetuer tuc me o Ges 6 3 Spool buffer AppleTalk interface 4 27 Spool buffers 02 00005 D 5 Spool ov
86. the DOS C QMSSYS prompt type the following command to delete the system and font files from your PC s hard disk del dld Installing System Software from a Macintosh to a Functional Printer NOTE This installation procedure uses the LocalTalk port 1 Turn on the printer and wait for I DLE to appear in the message window If the current printer system software is not functioning see Installing System Software and Fonts from a Macintosh to a Non Functional Printer below Printer Options 8 57 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Make sure you have PS Executive Series utilities provided on a disk with your printer installed on your Macintosh Installation instructions are in the README file on the PS Exec disk Use the following procedure to decompress the SystemLoader program and install it on your Macintosh s hard disk a Insert the System Software Macintosh disk provided with your printer in your Macintosh s floppy disk drive b Double click the SystemLoader icon c Specify a folder when the program asks for a place to install SystemLoader d Choose the Save button Start PS Exec Choose Download System Code from the PS Exec File menu The Download System Code dialog box appears In the Download System Code dialog box find SystemLoader and select it Choose the Send button to start the download When downloading is complete the message
87. the currently selected cassette See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information on using the control panel W Make sure the media is in good shape and meets all the specifications in appendix B Technical Specifications B Remove the toner cartridges and shake them horizontally Toner can settle and this procedure redistributes the toner Reinstall the cartridges in the printer and try to print again E If the print appears too light or dark change the print density dial settings for the toner cartridges as necessary see Adjusting Print Density in chapter 5 for details Then try reprinting NOTE Changing the print density affects the resident color management system and should be done only as a last step to improve print quality See chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output for more information on optimizing print quality Specific Print Quality Problems The following section addresses specific print quality problems Try the solutions in the sequence given If these do not solve the problem place a service call Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 600 dpi Jobs Print at 300 dpi W Make sure the printer is configured for 600 dpi See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information W Make sure you have enough RAM installed for the job you are trying to print If your printer has 12 MB RAM color documents print in 300 dpi Monochrome documents ca
88. to control the printer is through the Configuration menu which you access through the printer s control panel The printer is configured at the factory for the most typical printing environments so most users don t have to enter the Configuration menu often However there are a few situations that may require you to use the control panel W To configure the printer for printing on a different media type for example transparency instead of paper W To configure features not configurable through your application NOTE For information on restoring the factory default settings in the Configuration menu see the Administration Miscellaneous Restore Defaults section later in this chapter Configuration Method Priorities Options or values selected through an application or driver receive highest priority and override all other options or values Those selected through PS Executive Series Utilities have second priority Those selected through DOCs Document Option Commands have third priority and those selected through the control panel have the lowest priority Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 The Printer s Control Panel Figure 4 1 shows the printer s control panel Online gt Data O Message 4 Standard E Upper Optional 5 Paper I Lower Manual ff F
89. window NOTE If the start up page does not print see chapter 9 Troubleshooting Make sure you wait long enough for the initialization process to finish The Start up Page When you initially turn on your printer a start up page prints in approximately 4 minutes This page gives basic information about the printer such as the printer s name the PostScript emulation level and version and various printer settings For a detailed list of Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 whatthe start up page includes see The Start Up Page in chapter 5 If the start up page prints and the print quality is good goto chapter 3 Connecting the Printer Otherwise see chapter 9 Troubleshooting for more information and be aware of the following warning Ale Be sure to turn the printer off both switches and then unplug it before checking your installation Neale Bitte schalten Sie unbedingt den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die korrekte Installation des Druckers berpr fen Initial Printer Setup 2 45 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Installing Options If you purchased any printer options such as extra memory or emulations install these now If installation instructions are included with the option follow those and be sure to check for additional instructions in chapter
90. you control the disk through the Administration Disk Operations submenu fig 8 27 This section explains how to use the Disk Operations submenu to download and remove fonts or emulations You can also load optional fonts and emulations from cards as described earlier in this chapter in Using Font and Emulation Cards ADMINISTRATION DISK OPERATIONS 1 Select m Previous Next lt _ 7a DISK OPERATIONS s INSTALL OPTION DISK OPERATIONS DISK OPERATIONS COLLATION REMOVE OPTION DISK OPERATIONS DISK OPERATIONS SPOOL OVERFLOW FORMAT DISK Fig 8 27 Disk Operations Submenu Printer Options 8 43 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 CAUTION If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer this QMS magicolor LX software automatically reorganizes the files on the external hard disk when the printer is turned off and back on Once this reorganization is done the files on the hard disk can no longer be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to an earlier QMS Crown printer The printer release number is indicated on the status and start up pages This reorganization takes time Don t interrupt the reorganization because all files on the disk might be lost NOTE If an error occurs during these operations an error message displays until you press the Menu key You m
91. 0 Aalborg telefon 96333500 100K CHECKUP 9 4 1284 parallel 2 2 0 2 B 15 600 dpi Printing Jobs in 0 5 14 RAM requirements for B 1 Selecting through the control panel 4 48 A A media See also Glossary A4 See also Glossary Imageable region B 5 Margins 49 25 ie as ae det 5 10 B 5 Medias 2 52 39 ser oe aed 5 10 B 5 Printing On eikeen urera 4 19 DIZe Dover pa nukes a OR eec EAE B 5 Accessories Cards josie cuneo er eres a OeLO Dataproducts conversion 8 33 Dataproducts conversion kit B 8 Documentation B 8 Emulation cards 8 10 8 47 8 48 Font cards 8 10 8 47 8 48 Network interface 8 26 O FAX 6 iat ceatd RU TR A 1 Security cardi secon trae aa aa 8 13 Sheet feeders ss Lees eternon aaie 8 1 SIMMS nude ARE ES 8 22 Warranty considerations B 10 ADJUST xxxxx BIN 0 0 9 1 Adjusters See Paper guides Administration menu 4 20 Communications submenu 4 21 Disk Operations submenu 4 52 Emulations submenu 4 28 Engine submenu 4 46 Memory submenu 4 42 D 4 Miscellaneous submenu 4 50 Password yi esc aS hav RAE des 4 16 Saving changes 4 12 Special Pages submenu 4 37 Index Startup Options submenu 4 39 Adobe Illu
92. 00 Chapter 4 chapter The printer must be turned off and on again for the new value to take effect Size Meg Use this option to choose the number of megabytes of disk space allocated in addition to RAM to spool print job data Values range from 0 to 256 with a default of 10 MB Location Use this option to specify which disk to use for temporary spooling storage when an additional hard disk is available The choices are DSKO through DSK6 the internal hard disk the default Administration Disk Operations Collation The Collation submenu allows you to specify which disk and how much of that disk should be used to store collated print jobs when the jobs can t be accommodated by RAM Collation is selected in the Operator Control Collation menu described earlier in this chapter Turn the printer off and back on again for the value to take effect See Collating in chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for more details Size Meg Use this option to choose the number of megabytes of disk space allocated in addition to RAM on which to store collated print jobs Ten megabytes of collation disk space is probably sufficient for most printing applications Values range from 00 to 50 with a default of 10 MB Location Use this option to specify which disk to use for temporary storage of collated jobs when an additional hard disk is available The choices are DSKO through DSK6 the internal hard disk the default
93. 32 Scaling plots 4 32 Technical reference 1 5 4 2 Humidity Jede e time vt 2 2 I IBM PC AT cable pinouts B 12 XT cable pinouts B 12 DLEE seiko TO ATA AA dia Binns S ERR 9 2 IDLE INPUT PRINTING 9 2 Ignore parity serial interface 4 23 I 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Image Partial gueira Ed Ene OS EN 9 33 TOSAR tests is rue 9 33 Image not centered See Alignment Imageable region 5 10 B 5 G 2 Constraints 5 11 9 31 9 33 Not centered 004 9 31 Physical limits 5 10 Software limits 5 10 Incomplete jobs 0 9 26 INITIALIZING 0 9 2 INNER JAM ss esse 9 2 9 9 Inputbin Chaining i o soe ROT EC 4 19 Selecting 4 nus celer ot cer 4 18 Inputbin 1 naming 4 47 Inputbin 2 naming 4 47 Inputbin menu 00 4 18 Install Option n nanana asasena 4 53 Installation menu 4 15 Admin Password submenu 4 16 Operator Passwrd submenu 4 15 Use Admin Pwd submenu 4 16 Use Operator Pwd submenu 4 16 Installing Cleaning pad 22a ea 2 24 Developer cartridge 2 15 6 9 Emulation card ouuo 8 10 Font catd ober eue 8 10 OU DOC pu s ATA ry Lb 2 2A OPC Delt 5 So ATA ete ppt d 2 32 Options
94. 33500 Chapter 5 Administration Special Pages Administration Startup Options Administration Memory esses Administration Engine 05 Administration Miscellaneous Administration Disk Operations The Optional Features Menus Document Option Commands Header Trailer Page Commands Header Trailer Information Commands HP GL Emulation Features Commands HP PCL Emulation Features Commands Lineprinter Emulation Features Commands PostScript Emulation Features Commands Printer Features Commands Print Media and Daily Operations Introduci n 1 ic e be Reb E Reed Refilling the Media Cassette ouuo ua e a a ea ena Manual Feed sii oond ae Ce Rc ees Printing Transparencies 2 0 0 eee Printing Labels a Ta ADA a a Printing on Letterhead or Other Preprinted Media Printing on 3 Hole or Other Pre punched Media Printing Envelopes 0 ee eee eee eee Printing on Thick Paper Stocks Page Sizes Imageable Regions and Margins Page Sizes Dons Sube wA Ut pes Selecting and Storing Media Media Selection 0 0 0 0c eee eee Media Storage 0 ee eee eee eee Collating se he exch ie Rael oe Peg es Configuring the Printer for Collation Changing Print
95. 61 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 INSTALL TO DISK COMPLETE 19 Repeat steps 11 through 18 to install the rest of the printer fonts on the disk labeled System Fonts 2 Macintosh 20 When the system software and fonts are loaded use the following procedure to restart the printer a At the printer control panel press the Menu key The following appears in the printer message window QMS SOFTLOAD x x INSTALL TO DISK Press the Next key until the message window displays the following message QMS SOFTLOAD x x BOOT SYSTEM Press the Select key to enter the Boot System submenu The following message appears in the message window BOOT SYSTEM HARD DISK Press the Select key and the following message appears BOOT SYSTEM HARD DISK 6 Press the Select key The system begins loading and the following message displays BOOT SYSTEM LOADING At this point DO NOT TOUCH ANY KEYS until the following message appears in the printer message window 8 62 DLE Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 NOTE If you do touch some keys during this step you must go back to step 20a and start from there again Printer Options 8 63 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9
96. 77 7782 to order consumables Keep in mind that consumables can have an effect on your printer warranty See How Consumables Affect Your Warranty later in this appendix for details The industry standard for toner developer and OPC belt measurement is quoted at 5 coverage letter or A4 size media Toner Black 4 000 pages Cartridges Cyan 3 000 pages Magenta 3 000 pages Yellow 3 000 pages Developer Black 30 000 pages Cartridges Cyan 15 000 pages Magenta 15 000 pages Yellow 15 000 pages Oil Bottle and The first oil bottle and cleaning pad change will last Cleaning Pad approximately 1 500 pages After that they will last approximately 3 000 pages OPC Belt 50 000 planes Cartridge Waste Toner 6 000 planes per pack sold in 5 pack sets for a total of Pack 30 000 planes per set NOTE Measurement of waste toner pack and OPC life is done in planes rather than pages A plane is a pass ofthe OPC beltfor one color For example a one color page makes one pass one plane and a two color page makes two passes two planes Technical Specifications B 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Options These are the options available for this printer at the time this manual went to press Contact your QMS vendor for a complete updated list or in the US call QMS at 800 777 7782 250 sheet Sheet Feeder 30 envelope Envelope Cassette Emulations Font Cards Comes with a media cass
97. 8 MB RAM or more you can print four color documents in all supported page sizes in 600 dpi See appendix B Technical Specifications for specific information on RAM requirements and color resolution m User upgradable RAM Random Access Memory The resident RAM is user upgradable to as much as 64 MB which allows your printer s capacities to grow with your needs Additional RAM expands printing capabilities and can improve system performance B Font and Emulation Cards Fonts and printer emulations are contained on small printer circuit boards called cards which can be plugged into slots on the front of the printer Contact your QMS vendor for a complete list of available cards W Direct Network Interface for Ethernet or Token Ring A direct network interface is available for DECnet EtherTalk LAN Manager LAN Server Novell NetWare TCP IP and EtherTalk on Ethernet networks as well as LAN Manager LAN Server Novell NetWare and TCP IP on Token Ring networks E Hard disk expandability Introduction 1 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Your printer comes standard with an upgradable 80 MB internal hard disk Also through the resident 25 pin SCSI connector port the printer s capabilities can be expanded with up to six external hard disks A hard disk provides storage for a cache of character bitmaps downloaded outline fonts and other files 250 sheet Optional Sheet Feeder
98. A 1 Application notes A 1 Consumables use ee eo A 1 Printer specifications A 1 Technical information A 1 QCOLOR 4 da dara ge eh 1 7 7 1 Macintosh 2229 ert Res 7 4 Windows setup 0 7 1 QMS Announcements n s on sson A 2 CompuServe 000 A 2 Customer Technical Assurance A 2 FAX irs E IG ER PRA RR A 3 Printer drivers 00 000 A 2 Product registration 2 5 Technical information A 2 Utilities sie Y bai EU A 2 World wide offices A 4 OMS Crown asa Sole Fare depre te Reg 1 9 QMS customer support A 1 QuarkXPress Macintosh ese ena 3 7 3 8 QuarkXPress 3 3 PO p 3 16 Quick checks see uenia rtas 9 20 Quoted character ue o D 11 R Radio emissions ouuo C 1 Radio frequency ouuo C 1 Radio noise Canada C 1 RAM Allocating 2 008 4 42 Expansion 1 13 8 22 See also Memory Requirements for 600 dpi B 1 See also SIMMs Upgrades pasde prsg oe een aces B 1 Random Access Memory See RAM Rasterizing puede ende ores anes 1 10 Rev Sw Flow Serial interface 00 4 23 READERROR 8 44 Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Register roller cleaning 6 34 R gistration s dey Sonnac i epe nre G 2 Colts ick Aa a huh 9 32 Registration page
99. AA ATA A we wns 8 45 Identifying eo 8 45 Installing a fonte aus 8 47 Installing an emulation 8 47 Loading emulations 8 43 Loading fonts 0 8 43 UNO CA O 8 44 Removing a font 8 48 1 6 Removing an emulation 8 48 SCSLport cent RR een RR 8 43 F Factory defaults R store 4d blan 4 50 9 26 D 3 FCC compliance C 1 Features printer 0 1 7 Pile storage s i even 1 13 Flow control 3 20 4 23 4 24 Font Cache PostSeriptis AREA A DEL D 6 Pont CORD iovis ears 8 10 8 11 Installing eu eo 8 10 8 11 Removing 8 12 8 48 8 49 Fonts Bitmapped PCL 7 20 Caching ogy moea mAn hee tains kas S 1 13 Cards vsu eer res lel Downloadable B 2 Downloading 1 11 1 13 9 24 9 25 HP PGLE ei a vis ov RR EA hoes B 2 HP PCL 56 Aa Sedna danse ee 4 33 HP PCL printing 1 12 Laneprintet 54 06 eek 4 30 B 2 Memory 05 to aude gas te Res 9 25 PostScript suse rex B 2 PostScript memory 4 43 Printer css ARE ais rules Hee B 2 Printer resets ZA na dA DRA DA 9 25 Residente ouuo 1 12 B 2 Sample files 3 4 3 13 Scalable PCL 005 7 20 Format Disk option 4 53 FORMAT FAILED 8 46 Formatting External hard disk 8 44 8 45 Internal hard disk
100. B 10 Consumables B 10 Options ctp wonders sue pee mee B 8 Photographic CRD 7 10 Plain Papers o c e ornnes 1 10 5 11 See Paper Planes Ao TA nachos v deine Eo S G 3 Developer but ana bula AA AA 6 7 OPCib lt ese tune ro Ped aa 6 10 TOBGE eoe e ers nest m ett 6 4 Ports See Interface PostScript Compatibility of printer 1 12 Level 2 features 1 12 Level 2 page description language 1 12 PostScript VM 00 eee ee D 5 PS Heap 222 t sepe e D 5 Selecting s te tens 4 22 4 25 Technical reference 1 5 4 2 PostScript emulation Interpreter memory 4 43 Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Leyebl kn 1 12 4 29 4 58 B 2 L yel2i contre des 1 12 4 29 4 58 B 2 PostScript emulation mode 3 23 PostScript emulation option 4 28 PostScript errors lss esses 4 40 PostScript font cache D 6 PostScript operators scale xcd S ebebr b TR abe e 5 11 showpage 00 3 17 3 19 translate 24 Batis En wre eed aa 5 11 Power Consumption B 3 Frequency cock buy eed SG Sas B 3 Requirements 0 000 B 3 Power cable See Power Cord Powet cord ue rectus ERR 2 43 Connectiig enne D TrcpEE SD 2 43 Power requirements 2 3 Power switches Mains be ebbe e Les 2 44 B 2 R emote 12125 neberbeAe rele 2 44
101. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit einige Zeit abk hlen bevor Sie diese ber hren Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 CAUTION If you are replacing the pressure release pieces after the printer has been running make sure the fuser unit has cooled The fuser gets very hot and can damage these pieces 5 If you are replacing the pressure release pieces hold one of the pieces down close to its base and firmly slide the base between the fuser rollers on one end fig 6 9 Then repeat the process with the second pressure release piece at the other end of the fuser rollers When correctly positioned the pieces fit snugly between the rollers Pressure Release Piece Separator Latch Fig 6 9 Replace the Pressure Release Pieces 6 Close the pressure release lever on the end of the fuser unit 7 Close the separator pawl unit 8 Close the paper exit unit 6 24 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter Preventative Maintenance Table 6 2 below shows when preventative maintenance procedures described in this chapter should be performed Preventative Maintenance Schedule Atthis time You should Whenever print quality diminishes Clean the Charger Unit Clean the Precharger Unit When you have printed 20 000 Clean the Register and Transfe
102. Chapter 9 Clearing Inner Jams When the control panel message window displays INNER JAM media has jammed leaving the OPC belt cartridge and the leading edge has jammed around the transfer area To clear this jam use the following procedure 1 Openthe back cover by pressing the top right corner to release the spring latch fig 9 4 Fig 9 4 Open the Back Cover Troubleshooting 9 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 2 Open the transfer unit by grasping it in the center by the green handle and pulling it toward you and down fig 9 5 Fig 9 5 Open the Transfer Unit NOTE To avoid damage to the rollers always remove jammed media gently Also toner images on the media aren t fused set which means toner is still loose Avoid getting toner on your hands and clothes while removing the jammed media If you accidentally get toner on your hands or clothes lightly dust off as much as possible If some toner remains use cool not hot water to rinse it off your hands or washable clothing 9 10 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 3 Remove the jammed media if the media is around the drum by using the following procedure Otherwise skip to step 4 a Open the manual feed tray by pressing the top right corner fig 9 6 SEGA Manual Feed Tray Fig 9 6 Open the Manual Feed Tray Troubleshoo
103. Control and Administration with the Installation menu also appearing if a security cartridge is installed fig 4 2 Related functions are grouped together within submenus The scrolling order of menu options on a given level varies IDLE CONFIGURATION ADMINISTRATION CONFIGURATION OPERATOR CONTROL CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION optional COMMUNICATIONS EMULATIONS SPECIAL PAGES STARTUP OPTIONS MEMORY ENGINE MISCELLANEOUS DISK OPERATIONS COPIES COLLATION ORIENTATION INPUTBIN CHAIN INPUTBINS COLOR MODEL COLOR SEPARATION MEDIA MANUAL FEED SIZE OPERATOR PASSWRD USE OPERATOR PWD ADMIN PASSWORD USE ADMIN PWD Fig 4 2 Configuration Menu Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 The Installation Menu Chapter 4 The Installation menu fig 4 3 appears only when a security card is in use This menu is used to password protect the Operator Control and Administration menus CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION INSTALLATION USE ADMIN PWD A Select Previous pn lt INSTALLATION OPERATOR PASSWRD INSTALLATION ADMIN PASSWORD Fig 4 3 Installation Menu Installation Operator Passwrd The Operator Passwrd menu allows you to choose the password up to 16 characters in length used to enter the Operator Control menu when Use Operator Pwd is set to on Prin
104. D NORD QMS magicolor LX Printer User s Guide 1800409 001A EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Those listed as registered are registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office Some trademarks are also registered in other countries Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners QMS QMS PS the QMS logo Crown the Crown seal PS Executive Series magicolor magicolor LX QMS Inc PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems for a page description language which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Throughout this manual PostScript Level 2 is used to refer to a set of capabilities defined by Adobe Systems for its PostScript Level 2 page description language These capabilities among others are implemented in this product through a QMS developed emulation that is compatible with Adobe s PostScript Level 2 language Adobe Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop Tekton Adobe Systems Aldus Aldus FreeHand Aldus PageMaker Aldus Apple AppleTalk ColorSync LaserWriter Macintosh LocalTalk EtherTalk Apple Computer AutoCAD Autodesk Inc Centronics Centronics Data Computer Corporation Dataproducts Dataproducts Corporation CompuServe H amp R Block Cromalin Du Pont CorelDRAW Ventura Publisher C
105. E go qmsprint The QMS library section contains application notes printer drivers utilities technical information and announcement files The Internet The QMS server provides access to technical reports new product announcements a trade show schedule and other general information about QMS You can access the QMS server via any of the web viewers available to Internet users If you don t have access to a web viewer we recommend the NCSA Mosaic web viewer Mosaic is at ftp ncsa uiuc edu The QMS home page is at http www qms com The QMS ftp resource is ftp qms com QMS Customer Technical Assurance QMS Customer Technical Assurance is available in the US from 8 a m to 5 p m Central Standard Time at 334 633 4500 You can also fax questions to CTA at 334 QMS Customer Support EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix A 633 3716 Please indicate whether you would like a faxed or a phoned reply If you call for assistance have the following information ready so our technicians can help you more quickly Your phone number fax number and shipping address A description of the problem The printer model and serial number The type of host computer you are using The type and version of operating system you are using The interface you are using and if serial the protocol The application and version you are using The printer language you are using Your printer firmware version listed
106. IE model which is an international device independent standard for color For example to make a printer s color output look the same as the colors on your computer monitor a CMS translates the monitor s RGB colors into device independent CIE color and then translates from the CIE color into the printer s CMYK colors A CMS can warn you or automatically adjust color when the colors you specify are outside the output device s range and they can show you on screen how the printed output will look The advantages of using a CMS are that you get consistent color across all devices and an on screen preview of output However Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials Optimizing Color Output 7 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 CMSs are not portable across platforms they can be expensive and they do consume processing time and power at the host A few well known color management systems include Kodak ColorSense Agfa FotoFlow Electronics for Imaging EFIColor Pantone POCE and Apple ColorSync The following are shipped with your printer B A ColorSync device profile B A Pantone POCE CMM Color Matching Method m A Pantone POCE device profile B AnICC International Color Consortium device profile If this profile is not included with your printer call QMS Customer Technical Assurance to check for availability Instructio
107. Jamrecovery 0 esses 1 11 Message stays on 00 9 17 Paper DED sisson ts ee Os sae he ep 4 5 Paper type HP GL 4 32 Paper feed roller cleaning 6 38 Parallel cable pinouts Dataproducts 4 B 16 Centronics ine ante eL RE B 13 Parallel interface 3 11 4 25 B 2 Data Bits Leonie bra ens 4 26 Default interface 3 17 Emulations 4 25 End job mode 4 4 26 MinKSpool sssss 4 25 Mode sce epp DA Deica do 4 25 I 12 PS protocol voice wie niesu ES 4 26 Spool timeout 24 4 25 TESE 2s vat wate edes REN 3 17 Testing communication 3 17 Panty e eras ranie Bosh TA DA Gales 3 20 Serial interface 000 4 23 Password Administration menu 4 16 Operator Control menu 4 15 PC DIVET doti sie OA met Iis 3 12 3 13 PS Executive Series Utilities 3 12 Softwares AA cit Me ER SUR 3 13 Testing communication 3 17 Testing parallel port 3 17 Testing serial port 3 19 Troubleshooting 9 22 PC checklist a ATA de AA trt 9 22 PDF Macintosh 3 7 3 8 PG secar EE ATE ern 3 16 PDLs See Emulations PDX e sio pp defe nett 3 7 3 8 Pens 1 8 HP GL 0 4 32 Permanent Changes option 4 50 Phone numbers Accessories sors e ne Gre Pinks Resonate
108. L PAGES STATUS PAGE TYPE REGISTRATION PG SPECIAL PAGES SPECIAL PAGES TRAILER INPUTBIN SAMPLE PAGE SPECIAL PAGES SPECIAL PAGES TRAILER PAGE HEADER PAGE S SPECIAL PAGES y HEADER INPUTBIN Fig 4 8 Special Pages Submenu Administration Special Pages Print Status Use this option to print a printer status page The standard status page lists printer identification information and settings current memory configuration timeout values communication settings and input buffer sizes It also has tickmarks for measuring the printer s alignment The advanced status page option has the same information as the standard one with the addition of configuration menu settings fonts and downloaded emulations The Administration Special Pages Status Page Type menu discussed later in this section controls which type standard or advanced prints For more details see The Status Pages in chapter 5 Administration Special Pages Registration Pg This option controls the printing of a registration page This page allows you to check color registration placement of each of the process colors on the page Color marks going around the outside Printer Configuration 4 37 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 of the page demonstrate horizontal and vertical color registration Circles in the center of the page demonstrate cyan magenta and yellow color mixtures and red green and blue color mixtures Admin
109. Mode less than 45 W Available only on Energy Star models of the printer when Energy Saver mode is enabled See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for more information on Energy Saver mode Technical Specifications B 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Environmental Requirements L umidity R Ambient H i l H l l 0 10 175 20 27 30 325 40 C 32 50 63 5 68 80 6 86 90 5 104 F Ambient Temperature Optimal Operating Range po Acceptable Operating Range B 4 Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Media Handling Media Sizes Imageable Regions Margins Letter Legal 1 Color Legal 4 Color A4 Executive Com 10 DL Size Inches Letter 8 50 x 11 00 Legal 8 50 x 14 00 A4 8 27 x 11 69 Executive 7 25 x 10 50 Com10 9 50 x 4 125 DL 8 66 x 4 33 Size Inches Letter 8 11 x 10 61 Legal 1 C 8 11 x 13 61 Legal 4 C 8 11 x 11 7 A4 7 87 x 11 30 Executive 6 89 x 10 12 Com 10 9 19 x 3 89 DL 8 35 x 4 09 Top Bottom 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 2 1 5mm 5mm 5mm 5mm 0 12 0 12 3mm 3mm Appendix B Millimeters 215 90 x 279 40 215 90 x 355 60 210 00 x 297 00 185 00 x 267 00 241 30 x 104 78 220 00 x 110 00 Millimeters 205 90 x 269 40 205 90 x 345 60 205 90 x 297 18 200 00 x 287 00 175 00 x 257 00 233 30 x 98 78 212 00 x 104 00 Left Right 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 5
110. NE is Pantone s check standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials The ENERGY STAR logo United States Environmental Protection Agency The ENERGY STAR emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any product or service EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Dear Customer Mark Twain once said that only two things in life are certain death and taxes Well if he were living today we re sure he d add manuals to this list Just about everything you buy is accompanied by a manual and your new QMS printer is no exception Now we know that even though we ve devoted our lives to writing manuals very few people actually enjoy reading them So we ve written this manual with you in mind However there are more of you out there than there are printers and you all need something different Because of this we ve tried to design your manual to help you reach your destination as easily as possible Table of Contents Use this section as a road map to discover what there is to see in the manual and how the sections are related Overview of the Documentation This section functions as a Welcome Center It ll give you an idea about what s in this city your user s guide as well as in other nearby cities other useful documentation Overview of the Manual As long as you re at the Welcome Center you probably wanta list of local attractions This section lets you know which cha
111. ORD for three seconds then returns you to the CONFIGURATION menu If you specify the correct password you re allowed to enter the menu Selecting Options Most menus offer an array of choices within each menu group For example within the Administration menu group there is a Communications menu within the Communications menu there is a Parallel menu within the Parallel menu there is an Emulations menu and within the Emulations menu there are several choices such as ESP PostScript HP GL Lineprinter and PCL 5C LN03 and CCITT are listed if installed Table 4 1 shows how to select a menu option using as an example configuring the parallel interface for PostScript mode NOTE The printer must be off line and idle for you to change printer configuration If the printer is not idle jobs may be lost Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 ONLINE OFFLINE MENU SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT ONLINE OFFLINE NEXT SELECT ONLINE OFFLINE What Happens You take the printer off line You enter the Configuration menu You scroll to the Administration menu You enter the Administration menu and the first submenu Communications displays You enter the Communications menu and the first submenu Timeouts displays You scroll to the Serial menu You scroll to the Parallel menu You enter the Parallel menu
112. Pages estes gia ea des Be Panter ooi sure S IE B 7 QFFAX 2st edendi uetus A 1 Replacing 0 00005 6 4 StOTaBe cree enr repete ele ets 6 2 Toner cartridges 6 2 6 3 B 7 Warranty B 7 B 9 B 10 Context switching 1 10 D 7 Contrast Adjusting 08 5 15 Print density ese ese oa setei neia ee 5 15 Control panel n nana ao 4 3 Cancel key pere eren 4 6 Emulations 4 3 23 I 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Keypad language 4 51 DEDOS ala IS ub Messer ted 4 4 Media key ier Sect hover ERREIA 4 6 Ment 5 cu AA O are speeds 4 8 Menu Key i Beba A his nig 4 6 Message window 4 4 9 1 Next keys si ate den ond oed 4 7 Online Offline key 4 5 Previous Key raba a TEA TURA 4 6 Select key Lys Side A v s bete dene 4 6 Status messages 4 4 9 1 Tray select key 0 0 4 6 When to use 2 0000 4 2 Controller board 1 12 B 2 REMOVING i sica bog hee ees 8 18 Replacing sobre So ruben 8 20 Controller types seneki reddini B 2 Copies menus ci secos ur heo ns 4 18 COUT n 32a bre eee 4 33 7 18 B 2 CRD pea deen enous Speer EE YES 4 29 Crown 1 9 3 23 4 2 4 31 4 52 G 1 Compile ahead processing 1 10 Compressed data format 1 10 Configurable memory 1 10 Context switching
113. Plug the connector from one transformer box into the printer s LocalTalk port 2 Plug the connector from the other transformer box into the Macintosh 3 Connect the two transformer boxes with the telephone cable 4 Put terminating resistors into any open sockets in the transformer boxes This ensures proper communication between the Macintosh and the printer and helps speed up data transmission 5 Turn on the printer Printing from the Macintosh If your Macintosh was previously connected to a PostScript printer you can probably start printing now See your application documentation for instructions on sending a document to the printer or see Testing Macintosh Communication later in this chapter However to take advantage of all your printer s special features like QCOLOR automatic color control technology and media size and type selection or if you ve never printed to a PostScript printer before you need to take a few minutes to load the following software from the Macintosh disks we shipped with your printer Connecting the Printer 3 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 W PS Executive Series printer utilities PS Exec is a utilities software package for controlling the printer from the Macintosh For example through PS Exec you can turn off the start up page install printer resident screen fonts rename the printer download fonts manage hard disks and print font
114. Printable region See Imageable region See Margins Printer ACCESS 2 3 Cleanings eon PERO TM 6 41 Clearance ee a 2 3 Daily operations 1 2 5 1 Dimensions B 2 Electrical requirements B 3 Environmental requirements B 4 Handling oo 62 caren PES nne RES 6 26 Level location 00 2 2 Locks Up AA oes whan arn eS 9 26 Moving 2 23 6 18 6 22 Reinitialization 9 25 Resets 4 eer ale pope notes 9 25 Speed AA wes ere eere e e B 2 Weight 2 ee rede 2 6 8 1 B 2 Printer body cleaning 6 41 Printer configuration Using applications 41 Using DOC commands 4 1 Using HP PCL 5C commands 4 1 Using HP GL commands 4 1 Using PostScript commands 4 1 Using printer commands 4 1 Using PS Executive 4 1 Printer driver See also Driver PostScript emulation 3 13 Windows sees eee ee ee 3 14 Printer drivers CompuServe 000 A 2 I 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 See Windows installing Printer emulations Specifinis d AA o dee eats 3 23 Printer options 0000 1 5 Printer setup Using menus qu bl donas enh 3 20 Printing Blank Pagos ua 5e eee 9 26 D ty cycles pus AA A Ret B 2 In 600 API jks Sd hosters repr R 5 14 Incomplete jobs
115. S Text Ventura Intl Ventura Math Ventura US and Windows symbol sets cannot be used with the resident bitmap fonts courier10 courierlObold courierlOitalic courier12 courier12bold courierl2italic and lineprinter The five dingbat symbol sets PS Zapf Dingbats Ventura Dingbats Zapf Dingbats100 Zapf Dingbats200 and Zapf Dingbats300 can be used with all fonts If a mismatch between symbol set and font occurs the standard PCL font selection mechanism is used to locate a font that matches the selected symbol set With the standard set of fonts distributed by QMS this matches the Times font but other user installed fonts could change this result roman 8iso 60 pc 850iso 61 pc8 usiso 69 pc8 dniso 84 ecma 94iso 85 legaldesktop hpgerman ps math hpspanishmath8 iso 2microsoft pub iso 4pi font iso 6ps text iso IOventura intl iso 11ventura math iso 14ventura us iso 15windows iso 16ps zapf dingbats 1so 17ventura dingbats iso 21zapf dingbats100 iso 25zapf dingbats200 iso 57zapf dingbats300 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D 9o IncludeFeature criscrlf value Purpose value Controls the default line termination mode the lt ESC gt amp k G command Specifies the line termination treatment of a carriage return off treat line feed as a line feed or on treat line feed as a carriage return line feed combination The result of variou
116. See also Imageable region MB Printer Mem option 4 45 D 9 Mechanical problems 9 24 Medias esa aoe se ns 5 10 Changing size ouuo 4 19 Choosing a i 224 wine Bow PERPE 5 11 Collating eei Pese neEh us 5 12 Envelopes oh AA A BEA AA esee 5 8 Filling cassette 00 2 38 Heavy stock 4 17 5 11 Imageable regions B 5 Keys AA PR UE einige ye I NS 4 6 Laser Print oes TA sin ATA 5 11 Loading 2 41 5 2 5 5 Loading cassette 5 1 Lower cassette 1 13 8 1 Manual feed size 4 19 Margins 0 0 0 A 000 B 5 Orientation 0 sees 4 18 Output tray levels 6 26 Papers arava ec apis cese Tren 4 6 4 17 Recommended brands B 5 I 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Selecti n canda 4 6 4 17 5 11 SIZES RA Buk Scot 1 10 5 10 B 5 Specifications 200 B 5 Michi CE 5 11 Thick stock 4 17 5 8 5 11 See also Transparencies Transparency 4 6 4 17 TypeSs oi ye AA Alas A ES ne 1 10 Versatility iicet coven hws I 5 11 Weights ees hase reb eed B 5 Media cassette ouuo 2 38 Loading bp esee Y neg 5 1 See also Trays Media jams ss pod AS 9 18 Cassette capacity 0 9 18 Inner jamage sete eet noe 9 9 abel rach ie bin ADA ES DS 9 18 Misfeed jam 00005 9 6 Outer
117. Stops LFIS CRLF CRIS CRLF FFIS CRFF Orientation Autowrap Lines Per Page Margins Chapter 4 Specifies that a five digit number is to be prefixed to the beginning of each line The choices are On and Off Off is the default Specifies the number of spaces between tab stops The minimum is O and the maximum is 256 The default is 8 Stipulates whether each line feed in the print job is translated to a carriage return linefeed combination The choices are On and Off On is the default Determines whether each carriage return in the print job is translated to a carriage return line feed combination The choices are On and Off Off is the default Stipulates whether each form feed in the print job is translated to a carriage return form feed combination The options are On and Off On is the default Specifies whether text is printed Portrait or Landscape The default is Portrait Indicates whether long lines are to be wrapped onto the next line instead of being truncated The options are On and Off The default is on Specifies the number of lines printed on a page before an automatic page eject Interline spacing is set to the selected point size Logical pages consisting of more lines than specified are split into multiple pages The minimum Lines Per Page setting is 1 and the maximum is 128 The default is 87 This option defines the left right top and bottom margins from 0 to 17 inches The minimum settin
118. TED where RATE is the baud rate you selected and then SERIAL BAUD RATE 9 If you want to change other settings use the Next key to scroll to the setting you want to change then repeat the procedure described in steps 6 through 8 for finding and selecting new settings When you have finished making changes press the Online Offline key The message window displays Connecting the Printer 3 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 10 11 12 SAVE CHANGES NO To save your changes press the Next key so that the message window displays SAVE CHANGES YES Press the Select key to save the changes Press the Online key The Online LED lights and the keyboard message window displays IDLE To verify the changes you just made print a start up page by turning the printer off then back on Compare the serial port settings listed on the page to those in your AUTOEXEC BAT file Try the communication test again If a blank page ejects from the printer the printer and the computer are communicating You are ready to start printing If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly see chapter 9 Troubleshooting and refer to your DOS documentation for more information About the Printer s Communication Modes The following sections explain the communication mode choices you have with your printer incl
119. TOR CONTROL OPERATOR CONTROL COLOR SEPARATION INPUTBIN OPERATOR CONTROL OPERATOR CONTROL COLOR MODEL CHAIN INPUTBINS Fig 4 4 Operator Control Menu Operator Control Media NOTES The printer must be turned off and on again before changes to this menu take effect The Media key on the printer s control panel provides a faster means of Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 changing this setting but does not contain a thick stock option Use this option to tell the printer what type of media is in each tray so the printer can optimize output for that media type To use the Media menu first select a media tray upper for the standard cassette slot lower for the optional sheet feeder or manual for the manual feed tray Then select paper transparency or thick stock for that tray Select Paper for printing paper envelopes or labels Select transparency for printing on overhead transparency film Select thick stock for the manual feed tray only for printing on stock that is between 24 and 43 Ib 90 g m and 163 g m The factory default is paper Operator Control Copies Use this option to specify the number of copies of each job sent to the printer from 001 to 999 The factory default is 001 Operator Control Collation Use this option to turn collation off or on The factory default is on See Collating in chapter 5 for more details Opera
120. Tape rear view 13 Repeat steps 1 12 to load the cyan then the magenta and finally the yellow developer and toner cartridges making sure each toner cartridge is loaded onto the corresponding developer cartridge 2 18 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 When you finish the black cartridges should be in the last slot toward the back of the printer then the cyan in the next slot the magenta in the third slot coming forward and the yellow in the front slot After the toner and developer are installed you need to remove the pressure release pieces Initial Printer Setup 2 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Removing the Pressure Release Pieces Two pressure release pieces help relieve tension on the fuser rollers to protect the rollers from accidental damage during shipment These pieces must be removed before printing Use the following procedure to remove these pieces 1 With the top cover still off pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back and down to open it fig 2 13 Fig 2 13 Open the Paper Exit Unit rear view 2 Pull back the two latches one on each side of the separator pawl unit to unlock it Then tilt the pawl unit back in the direction of paper exit unit atthe back of the printer fig 2 14 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 P Se
121. a and Daily Operations has instructions for refilling the cassette for printing on other media types and sizes and for inserting media manually Chapter S also contains information about margins and imageable areas 1 Pull the paper cassette out of the printer fig 2 29 be Fig 2 29 Remove the Paper Cassette Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 2 Make sure the size key slide on the back end of the cassette is set for letter or A4 size media fig 2 30 NOTE The printer comes from the factory configured to print on letter or A4 size media If you want to print on a different size media see Refilling the Media Cassette in chapter 5 for information Also see chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information on setting size through the control panel EX LT A4 LG U em Fig 2 30 Check the Cassette Size Key Slide Initial Printer Setup 2 39 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 From the paper wrapping determine which is the printing side of the paper an arrow points in the direction of the printing side on most wrappers Then remove a stack of paper approximately 1 27 mm 250 sheets or less NOTE Make sure the paper is in good condition fr
122. a name to the outputbin on the top of your printer The factory default is upper Administration Engine Clear Warning Use this option to clear a status message that doesn t automatically clear after the related corrective action is taken for example TOP COVER OPEN clears after you close the top cover but REPLACE BELT does not clear automatically after a new OPC belt cartridge is installed Options in this menu include all status messages that don t automatically clear Select the message that you want to clear after correcting the specified status See Status Messages in chapter 9 for details NOTE Ifyouclear REPLACE FUSERor100K CHECKUP the counter that tracks that particular service resets to 0 and the message does not reappear until after another complete cycle If you continue to use the printer without the proper maintenance or part replacement print quality can deteriorate and the wear on the printer can shorten the printer s life Administration Engine Default Resolution This option allows you to choose either 600 or 300 dpi printing The factory default setting is 600 dpi If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM you can print color or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or you can print monochrome documents in 600 dpi You must upgrade printer RAM to be able to print color documents in 600 dpi See appendix B Technical Specifications for specific information o
123. actory default Standard setting should not be changed if you are using the factory default Enhanced halftone setting This option allows you to choose the amount of gamma correction for the printer Choices are Gamma71 0 Gamma53 1 Gamma80 2 Gammal06 3 None 4 The default is None The factory default None set ting should not be changed if you are using the fac tory default Enhanced halftone setting Otherwise the gamma setting should correspond to the printer default halftone chosen For example when the 53 Ipi x 45 halftone is selected the Gamma53 gamma setting should be selected Administration Emulations Lineprinter Twelve configuration choices are available Font Point Sz 100ths Character Maps In this submenu you can enter the name of a font any PostScriptfont on the printer to be used for Lineprinter jobs The factory default is Courier To see a list of PostScript fonts available print an advanced status page from the front control panel from the Administration Special Pages Print Status submenu Sets the five digit value used to specify the point size of the font for the current print job The range is from 00400 4 points to 25600 256 points The default is 00880 8 8 points Specifies the type of character map to be used The choices are ASCII and EBCDIC The default is ASCII Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Line Numbering Tab
124. ad developer and toner cartridges the colors must be in a set order from the back of the printer to the front Black should be loaded in the slot closest to the rear of the printer followed by cyan then magenta and finally yellow in the front slot Fig 2 6 Cartridge Loading Order front view UEN The developer and toner are highly combustible powders never burn them Also avoid inhaling loose devel oper or toner or getting them around your eyes they can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation Bei Entwickler und Toner handelt es sich um gef hrliche Pulver die leicht entz ndlich sind sie d rfen deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Ber hrung kommen Einatmen oder Beriihrung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden da dieses zu Beeintrachtigungen der Atemwege Haut oder Augenreizungen f hren k nnte Initial Printer Setup 2 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 CAUTION The same color developer and toner cartridges must always be loaded in the same place on the printer To prevent accidental mixing of colors each toner cartridge has pins that are keyedto fitonly the developer cartridge of the corresponding color Never force a toner cartridge onto the wrong developer cartridge This can damage the cartridges and the printer NOTE A developer cartridge must be installed before the toner cartridge of the same color 1 Remove the developer cartridge from its protective b
125. ade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 extremely sensitive to hand oils and scratches both of which reduce print quality When you must set it down gently lay it on a clean lint and dirt free surface such as on fresh paper for the printer 2 Lift the OPC belt cartridge handle up to unlock it and pull the cartridge straight out of the printer fig 6 11 3 Remove the wire cleaner from the cartridge fig 6 11 Fig 6 11 Remove the OPC Belt Cartridge 6 28 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Holding the cartridge by its edges fold the green end handle back down and set the cartridge up on that end The cartridge will tilt slightly to one side 5 Locate the three brass colored latches which hold the charger unit in place Then swing each latch to the side to free the charger unit fig 6 12 6 Grasp the green handle on the end of the charger unit and lift the unit out of the cartridge fig 6 12 Then place the OPC belt cartridge in its protective bag or a dark area to protect it from light and set it aside until you are ready to reinstall it Charger Grid Brass Latches Brass Latches Fig 6 12 Open Charger Unit Brass Latches Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 29 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 7 Use clean dry cotton cloths to gently wipe up any
126. ader icon c Specify a folder when the program asks for a place to install SystemLoader d Choose the Save button Turn the printer off and then on again Wait until the following message displays in the message window OMS SOFTLOAD x x READY TO BOOT Then immediately press the Select key The following message appears OMS SOFTLOAD x x BOOT SYSTEM Press the Next key until INSTALL TO DISK appears on the second line of the message window Options 6 59 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 8 60 10 OMS SOFTLOAD x x INSTALL TO DISK Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu Press the Next key until SERIAL appears in the second line of the message window INSTALL TO DISK SERIAL Press the Select key to enter the Serial submenu The following message appears SERIAL TARGET DISK 6 Press the Select key The following message appears in the window INSTALL TO DISK CONNECTING Atthe Macintosh start SystemLoader from your hard disk by double clicking the SystemLoader icon Inthe dialog box that appears make sure the correct download port is selected then choose the Send button to start the download When the downloading process is complete the message Download Complete appears on the Macintosh screen and the following appears in the printer message window
127. ag starting with the black cartridge The developer cartridges are color coded on their tops Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 2 Grasp the two green latches one at each end of the cartridge and raise them straight up fig 2 7 to open them 3 Holding the developer cartridge by the green latches gently lower it into the open cartridge slot closest to the back end of the printer until it seats firmly under the securing latches fig 2 7 Developer Cartridge Fig 2 7 Load Developer Cartridge front view Initial Printer Setup 2 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 4 Close the green latches by pushing them forward and down to hold the developer cartridge in place fig 2 8 Developer Cartridge Latches Fig 2 8 Close Latches rear view 2 14 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 5 Grasp the tab on the top of the developer cartridge Pull the tab and attached clear tape straight up and out of the cartridge making sure the tape comes completely out fig 2 9 Then discard the tab and tape Fig 2 9 Remove Sealing Tape rear view 6 Locate the toner cartridge that matches the color of the developer cartridge just installed and remove it from its protective bag Toner cartridges are color coded black cyan magenta or yellow on th
128. age images to the printer Print Media The material on which the printer prints for example paper transparencies and labels Printer Driver A file that enables the application to talk to the printer translating computer data into a form understood by the printer Usually the printer driver is in the application Protocol A set of procedures that control how data is transmitted between devices QCOLOR A QMS developed technology for automatically optimizing color printing from Windows and Macintosh applications QCOLOR configures the magicolor LX for the best output quality based on the contents of the document for example text line art presentation graphics photographs or scans Resident Permanent printer features Glossary G 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 SIO Simultaneous Interface Operation a Crown function that allows printing to all three of the printer s concurrently active ports See also Crown Software Loadable System SLS Your printer offers a software loadable system SLS which allows you to add features and enhancements as they become available from QMS This feature works through the parallel port via the control panel or PS Executive Series Utilities and it makes it easier for you to keep up with the latest software changes Start Up Page A page generated automatically when you turn on the printer if it has not been disabled through the control panel an application su
129. akt an die im Handbuch beschriebene Vorgehensweise da sonst Verletzungsgefahr bestehen k nnte Printer Features The following overview acquaints you with the printer s major features and their benefits Consult the table of contents or index blue pages of this manual to find more information on the features Color Laser Technology The magicolor LX laser printer features advanced color laser technology that allows it to produce inexpensive durable 300 or 600 dpi prints on plain paper or transparencies at 3 to 6 color pages and 12 monochrome pages per minute Qcoron Technology The magicolor LX laser printer features QCOLOR a QMS developed technology for automatically optimizing color printing for Windows and Macintosh applications When enabled QCOLOR configures the magicolor LX for the best output quality based on the contents of the document for example text line art presentation graphics photographs or scans Introduction 1 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 The magicolor LX printer also supports device independent color either directly or through a color management system such as Apple s ColorSync and Pantone s POCE This printer also supports the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM the standard model for color reproduction in graphic arts and publishing to help you see the most accurate PANTONE Color simulations for proofing Chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output contains mor
130. allow your application to control color settings Overhead if you re printing overhead transparencies You can use any of the QCOLOR color setup options for transparency printing if you choose the Customize button and then select the Transparency option in the Color Setup dialog box without changing any other options If you do this the Customize option will appear in the QCOLOR setup Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 listbox when you return to the Color Control Center dialog box NOTE The media tray you re using must be configured for the media type it contains This can be done through the printer front panel in the Operator Control Media menu See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for more information on media 5 Choose OK NOTE The settings chosen through Windows override settings chosen through the printer s front panel Also some applications like Aldus PageMaker and Ventura Publisher specify color outside the Windows driver in which case the color settings in the Windows driver are ignored Because QCOLOR automatically adjusts the Halftone CRD Calibration Gamma Correction Dithering Color Model and Media Selection these settings in the Color Setup dialog box do not have to be adjusted To get more information about these and other options in the driver choose the Help button or see the Fine Tuning Color Output sectio
131. ally press the Cancel key and takes you back one character space at a time in an alphanumeric value Press the Select key to enter a menu or to select a menu option or an individual character in an alphanumeric value Press the Previous key to scroll backwards through the options in a menu or to decrease an individual character Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 in an alphanumeric value Press the Next key to scroll forward through the options Next in a menu or to scroll through characters available for gt alphanumeric values NOTE Always make sure the printer is idle and off line before making configuration changes If the printer is not idle jobs may be lost Printer Configuration 4 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Using the Configuration Menu This section covers how to password protect menus how to select options and how to enter and save values Password protected Menus The Operator Control and Administration menus may be password protected if an optional security card is used with the printer If the message window displays ENTER PASSWORD when you use the Select key to enter a menu a password is required see your system administrator For information on entering passwords see Entering Alphanumeric Values later in this chapter If an invalid password is entered the message window flashes INVALID PASSW
132. amount of RAM KB dedicated to caching previously scaled bitmap representations of fonts for the PostScript emulation interpreter This reduces the number of times a PostScript font must be converted from outline form to bitmap form thus reducing processing time The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system Administration Memory K Mem Emulation This is the amount of RAM KB dedicated to non PostScript emulations for temporary storage and for loading optional emulations The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system If you are using the Printer Configuration 4 43 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 optional CCITT emulation this value should be increased by 200 KB Administration Memory K Mem Emul Tmp This is the amount of RAM KB to be used by non PostScript emulations for storing downloaded fonts The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system Administration Memory K Mem Display This is the amount of RAM KB dedicated to the display lists The display list client holds the intermediate representation of pages to be printed in compressed blocks of data The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system Administration Memory K Mem Framebuff This is the amount of system RAM KB dedicated to the frame buffers Thi
133. an do this from the Windows Control Panel by double clicking the Printers icon and then choosing the Setup button Also you can getto the PostScript Printer driver dialog box from within most Windows applications usually by choosing Print Setup from the File menu and then choosing the Setup or the Options button Check your application help or documentation for details Optimizing Color Output 7 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 In the PostScript Printer dialog box choose your printer magicolor LX in the Printers drop down list Choose the Color Setup button In the Color Control Center dialog box choose one of the following Automatic Color Control if you re printing a combination of document types Automatic Color Control is the best option for most jobs because it s designed to provide the best color output for a large variety of documents However if for some reason the Automatic setting doesn t provide satisfactory color output for a particular page element or document type then select a more specific QCOLOR setting for example Overhead for overhead transparencies or Photographic for scanned images Graphics if you re printing color graphics Grayscale if you re printing images with gray shades Photographic if you re printing photographic images Text and Spot Color if you re printing text or spot colors Third Party Color Management System CMS to
134. and the header and trailer pages The Start up Page When you turn on your printer a start up page prints in approximately 4 minutes unless you disable this feature This page gives the following information about the printer The printer name The PostScript Level 2 emulation version number The firmware revision number The interface port settings emulation communication protocols The number of typefaces stored in the printer The number of pages printed to date The amount of resident RAM The printer name user definable through PS Executive Series Utilities A color block for each of the process colors B The current halftone selected The highest possible resolution for monochrome and four color jobs that can be printed on the currently Print Media and Daily Operations 5 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 selected page size with the amount of printer RAM currently installed Disabling the Start up Page After you install the printer and establish communication between the printer and the host you may want to disable the start up page to conserve toner developer and print media You can do this through the printer front panel see chapter 4 Printer Configuration or through PS Executive Series Utilities see the on line help The Status Pages There are two types of status pages the standard status page 1 page that gives the general setup and the advanced statu
135. ant the changes you made to take effect press Select and then press the Online Offline key to put the printer back on line If you want the changes you made to take effect press the Next key to change NO to YES and then press the Select key The changes are saved and take effect when you put the printer back on line If the Message Window displays WAITING FOR IDLE the system is finishing jobs in progress under the old configuration values but is not allowing any new jobs to begin The printer then accepts new jobs and processes them using the new configuration values NOTE Some menu changes require that the printer be rebooted before they take effect including the following Operator Control Media Administration Communications Serial Mode Administration Communications Parallel Mode Administration Emulations ESP Default Administration Startup Options Error Handler Administration Disk Operations Spool Overflow Administration Disk Operations Collation 4 12 Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 If you make configuration changes to other menu options and they don t seem to be taking effect wait until the current jobs end and then try turning the printer off and on again Printer Configuration 4 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 The Main Menu Groups The main menu groups in the Configuration menu are Operator
136. arriage return and LF line feed characters The options are CR CR LF LF CR CR LF LF LF CR CR LF CR LF CR or LF CR LF The factory default is CR CR LF LF Identifies the point size in hundredths and is selectable in increments of 25 The minimum value is 25 the maximum is 99975 and the default is 1200 Allows you to choose whether or not to retain temporary PCL 5C macros and fonts at the end of each print job The options are on save the temporary macros and fonts and off temporary fonts and macros are deleted at the end of each job The default value is off Specifies whether to enable or disable the printing of PCL 5 scalable fonts The choices are enable the factory default and disable When you enable this option and print PCL 4 documents PCL 5 may substitute scalable fonts that could cause your PCL 4 documents to print incorrectly When this option is disabled fonts are bitmapped This option is designed to be used for PCL 4 documents that print incorrectly under PCL 5 Sets the default font index when Select by Index is chosen in the Default Font menu It is a numeric value with a minimum setting of 0 a maximum of 32767 and default of 0 Determines whether HP GL 2 documents are printed in shades of gray on or color off the default is color off Off Pen Color Defaults Pen 0 White Pen 1 Black Pen 2 Red Pen 3 Green Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg te
137. ashing character You scrol he next value for the flashing character The second character flashes The last character flashes to show it is ready to be changed You scroll to the previous value for the flashing character a space character This changes the value from 500 to 50 You choose 50 as the new setting for Scaling Percent After three seconds you are returned to your previous position in the HP GL submenu You return to the top level menu You scroll to the Yes option You save your changes You put the printer on line Table 4 2 Entering Alphanumeric Values Printer Configuration Message Window HP GL SCA SCA 1 00 SCA 2 00 SCA 3 00 SCA 4J00 SCA 5 00 SCA 5 00 SCA LING PERCENT LING PERCENT LING PERCENT LING PERCENT LING PERCENT LING PERCENT LING PERCENT LING PERCENT 50 0 SCA 50 50 LING PERCENT IS SELECTED HP GL SCA LING PERCENT SAVE CHANGES NO SAVE CHANGES YES IDLE EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Saving Configuration Selections Press the Online Offline key to exit the Configuration menu or press the Menu key to back out of the Configuration menu one level ata time If you made changes before exiting the menu the message window displays SAVE CHANGES NO If you don t w
138. ause it must be unplugged before you perform this task If you don t have an anti static wrist strap discharge your body s static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any printer boards or components and before removing the tray assembly cover Redischarge your body each time after walk ing around and before touching the printer tray assembly again Handle the tray carefully and try to handle it by the edges only Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 1 Turn the printer off and remove the power cord Disconnect all interface cables from the printer 2 Position the printer so that the back is facing you 3 Using a screwdriver loosen the two mounting screws that hold the controller board to the printer fig 8 12 4 Grasping the board by the top and bottom metal rims gently pull the controller board straight out and lay it on a flat surface fig 8 12 IET ANN Fig 8 12 Remove the Mounting Screws 5 Install your printer option and then refer to the following section Replacing the Controller Board Printer Options amp 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Replacing the Controller Board This section explain how to replace the controller board after installing a printer option The following instructions are written for advanced users Do not attempt this procedure if you have no e
139. automatically pull sheets from a cassette Media See print media Mode One of several alternative conditions or methods of operation Network Administrator See system administrator Option In this manual either a choice available in the printer s Configuration submenu or an extra accessory you can purchase for your printer G 2 Glossary EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 PDL Page Description Language a programming language such as PostScript or HP GL that translates messages from a computer to a printer See also PostScript Planes Toner developer and OPC belt measurements rather than copies for usage A plane is a pass of the OPC belt for one color so a one color page makes one pass one plane a two color page makes two passes two planes and so forth Plain Paper Uncoated general purpose paper designed for photocopy printing found in most offices It is less expensive than laser paper but does not offer the same output quality that laser paper does This printer has plain paper capability it produces good output on documents such as reports and newsletters See also laser paper PostScript A page description language trademarked by Adobe Systems Inc PostScript Level 2 capabilities among others are implemented in the printer through a PostScript emulation developed by QMS PostScript Level 2 emulation is the native language of your printer s controller It describes text graphics and p
140. back of the printer on the lower left side CAUTION Make sure that the main power switch on the back of the printer is off the O is pressed down Make sure the remote power switch on the front is off the button is out 1 Connect one end of the power cord to the rear of the printer fig 2 34 Fig 2 34 Connect the Power Cord Initial Printer Setup 2 43 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 2 Connect the opposite end of the power cord to a grounded surge protected electrical outlet Using the Power Switches There are two power switches on your printer a main switch on the rear and a remote switch for convenience on the front Only one switch has to be off to turn off the printer however both switches must be on to turn on the printer Turn on the back switch by setting it to the on position Turn on the front switch by pressing it in CAUTION If the printer won t be used for several days such as over a weekend or if any maintenance work is done make sure at least one of the power switches is off This reduces wear and extends the life of the fuser When first turned on the printer goes through an initialization warm up and self testing period of approximately 4 minutes Close to the end of this process the printer produces a start up page see the next section for information on the start up page When warm up is complete IDLE displays in the message
141. be connected at DIN 8 Technical Specifications B 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Serial The table below gives the correct pinouts for the printer end of the 25 pin serial cable used to connect a computer and printer Pinout Serial Pin No SO tA RU L2 20 Name TxD RxD RTS optional CTS DSR optional GND DTR optional IBM PC XT PC AT and Compatible Computers Pinout IBM PC XT Pinout IBM PC AT Printer DB 25S 1 2 3 4 5 20 6 8 IBM PC XT DB 25P IBM PC AT DB 9P 1 2 3 5 6 8 Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Centronics Parallel The following table describes the Centronics parallel interface cable that can be used with your printer See Notes to the Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table on the next page for more information Pinout Signal Return Signal Direction Centronics Pin No Pin No Parallel 1 19 STROBE In 2 20 DATA 1 In 3 21 DATA 2 In 4 22 DATA 3 In 5 23 DATA 4 In 6 24 DATA 5 In 7 25 DATA6 In 8 26 DATA7 In 9 27 DATA 8 In 10 28 ACKNLG Out 11 29 BUSY Out 12 30 PE Out 13 SELECT Out 16 GND 18 VCC TEST 19 30 GND 31 IPRIME In 32 FAULT Out 33 GND Technical Specifications B 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Notes to the Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table Direc
142. belt cartridge 9 32 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Sharp Horizontal Lines across the feed direction E Place a service call Partial Images or Image Too Small m Check the imageable regions for the size media you are using see Media Handling section of Appendix B Technical Specifications Are you trying to print outside of the imageable region of the page If so change to a larger size media or adjust the margin s through your application B The charger unit or various roller and plates may be dirty See Preventative Maintenance in chapter 6 for instructions on how to clean these parts Smearing on Transparencies W Make sure the printer is set for transparency printing use the Media key on the printer s control panel to tell the printer transparencies are in the currently selected cassette See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information on using the control panel W Make sure the transparency stock is in good shape and meets all the specifications in the Media Handling section of appendix B Technical Specifications Try printing a few transparencies ata time and giving the sheets a chance to cool between prints W Make sure the transparencies are loaded print side up and the cassette is not overloaded 50 sheets or less not over the upper limit mark inside the cassette E Check the print density dials for the toner cartridges T
143. c icon to run the program Check the README file for updates and see the PS Exec Help for information on using the program Installing LaserWriter 8 x and the magicolor LX 4 1 PPD 1 If you haven t already follow the instructions given above in Installing the Printer Utilities Make backup copies of your current LaserWriter drivers and the contents of your Printer Descriptions folder If you use System 7 these files are stored in the Extensions folder in your System Folder If you use System 6 these files are stored in the System Folder Delete your LaserWriter 8 preferences files If you use System 7 this file is stored in the Preferences folder in your System Folder If you use System 6 this file is stored in the System Folder Open the PSExec 3 xx Folder then the Drivers folder then the LaserWriter folder to display the LaserWriter 8 x icon among other things Drag the LaserWriter 8 x icon to your current System Folder The system knows where to copy it If you re prompted for permission to copy the file to the folder choose OK System 7 users Create a folder called Printer Descriptions inside the Extensions folder inside the System Folder if one doesn t already exist Connecting the Printer 3 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 10 11 12 13 System 6 users Create a folder called Printer Descriptions inside the System Folder if one doesn t alr
144. cartridge by the green handle firmly slide it the rest of the way into the printer until it snaps into place It is in place when you can see the green arrows inside the metal frame of the printer Turn the green handle on the OPC belt cartridge down to lock the cartridge in place Close the manual feed tray Clear the REPLACE BELT status message through the control panel using the Administration Engine Clear Warning menu See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for details on using the control panel This completes the steps for replacing the OPC belt cartridge Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 6 12 Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle This section covers replacing the cleaning pad and oil bottle in your printer The cleaning pad removes printing debris such as excess toner and paper dust from the fusing unit The oil helps prevent toner from sticking to the fuser rollers Replace the oil bottle and cleaning pad when FUSER OIL LOW or OUT OF OIL appears in the printer s message window The first oil bottle and cleaning pad change is required at approximately 1 500 pages After that changes are required at approximately 3 000 page intervals Changing these on a regular basis helps retain optimal print quality Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section are in chapter 2 Initial Pri
145. ccompanying the pack for assembling it being careful not to puncture the bag 3 Open the waste toner door by pushing the cover on the top right corner fig 2 22 Waste Toner Cover Fig 2 22 Open the Waste Toner Door side view 2 30 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 4 Holding the waste toner pack by the side tab insert the pack into the printer until it fits securely fig 2 23 Then lift up slightly on the tab to be sure the pack is level and centered Side Tab Fig 2 23 Insert the Waste Toner Pack in the Printer 5 Close the waste toner door Initial Printer Setup 2 31 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Installing the OPC Belt Cartridge This section covers installing the OPC Organic Photoconductor belt cartridge into your printer See How Your Printer Works in appendix D for details on the role the OPC belt plays in printing Replacing the cartridge is covered in chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance To install the OPC cartridge 1 Open the manual feed tray fig 2 24 by pushing the top right corner to release the spring latch Manual Feed Tray Fig 2 24 Open the Manual Feed Tray 2 32 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 CAUTION The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights and
146. ch as PS Executive Series Utilities a PostScript operator ora DOC function This page gives limited information on the printer such as the printer s name the number of pages printed to date current interface settings and the amount of RAM available Status Page A page or multiple pages listing detailed printer status such as identification information and settings current memory configuration timeout values communication and buffer settings and available fonts The printer has two status page options standard and the advanced The standard page is more detailed than a start up page but far less so than the advanced option See The Status Pages in chapter 5 for details System Administrator The person in charge of operating a network also called a network administrator Trailer Page A separator page that prints after the last page of a print job to identify a print job and help users sort out jobs For details on this page and what it monitors see Header and Trailer Pages in chapter 5 Also the information on trailer pages for this printer can be customized with QMS Document Option Commands The QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual which came with your printer contains more information Utility Software such as PS Executive Series Utilities that performs a specific function of system management such as maintaining disks and files or controlling a printer G 4 Glossary EDNord Istedgade 37A 900
147. cleaning padremoves printing debris such as excess toner and paper dust from the fusing unit The oil keeps toner from sticking to the fuser rollers Instructions for installing the cleaning pad and oil bottle are given in this section Replacing the cleaning pad and oil bottle are covered in chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance To install the cleaning pad and oil bottle 1 Remove the cleaning pad and oil bottle from their protective bags Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 2 Holding the cleaning pad by its center tab align the center of the tab with the triangle mark on the printer tab side away from the triangle fig 2 17 3 Slide the pad into the slot above the heat roller fig 2 17 The pad is correctly positioned when it is centered snugly in the slot Fig 2 17 Install the Cleaning Pad front view Initial Printer Setup 2 25 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 4 Snap the separator pawl unit closed fig 2 18 Paper Exit Unit Separator Latches Fig 2 18 Close Separator Pawl Unit front view 2 26 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 5 Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle retainer and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the printer fig 2 19 NOTE The spout of the oil bottle has a seal
148. clearance for your printer 40cm 16 70cm 28 E z 5 5 5 5 3 Soe eee ee m m eee M M m m ER ata m M m ER aia Rp m AS A lee RA aa ee Fig 2 1 Printer Clearance Power Requirements Your printer requires a properly grounded earth connection 120 volt 12 volts outlet The required frequency is 60 Hz 2 Hz The electrical connection should be direct not via a branched socket and should be surge protected Noise generating equipment shouldn t be connected to the same electrical outlet as the printer Initial Printer Setup 2 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 What s Included in the Shipment In addition to this manual your shipment should contain the following items QMS magicolor LX printer OPC belt cartridge 4 developer cartridges 1 each yellow magenta cyan black 4 toner cartridges 1 each yellow magenta cyan black Cleaning pad Oil bottle Waste toner pack Power cord PS Executive Series Utilities disks Softload system back up disks includes printer system software and PostScript fonts on DOS and Macintosh disks and PCL fonts on a DOS disk Interface cables aren t included with the printer Contact your QMS vendor if you need cables See chapter 3 Connecting the Printer for information on cables and appendix B Technical Specifications for cable pinouts If you
149. come packed down Take the toner cartridges out and gently shake them horizontally to loosen the toner Then reinstall the cartridges making sure the cartridges go into the correct color slots See Replacing the Toner Cartridge in chapter 6 for details If these solutions do not work contact your QMS vendor Not All Pages Print 1 Check your cable You could have the wrong kind of cable or your printer may not be configured for the correct cable and port Make sure no one pressed the Cancel key while your job was printing Check the control panel message window to see if the media cassette is empty Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 4 Increase the emulation timeout for HP PCL and HP GL files or the PS wait timeout for PostScript files 5 If you are using a PC make sure that the mode statement in your AUTOEXEC BAT file ends in a p so that print jobs are sent until the printer accepts them mode lptl p 6 Send an end of job in case a previous job lacked this command Troubleshooting 9 27 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Print Quality Problems Generally Poor Print Quality W Make sure the printer is set for the type of media paper transparency film or thick stock you are printing on use the Media key on the printer s control panel to tell the printer whether paper or transparencies have been loaded in
150. commands Both temporary or permanent objects can become external objects when the current resource is changed for temporary objects Retain Temporary must be setto On True or On Compatibility External objects become permanent when the resource in which they reside becomes the current resource User downloaded PCL objects with the exception of palettes are identified by an ID when they are downloaded The ID is usually set by the file performing the download If not the system will provide a default value normally 0 but this can be set using the ncludeFeature install DOC If two objects of the same type are provided with the same ID the last one received replaces the former From that point on downloaded objects are accessible by their IDs Resource A resource is a location where downloaded objects such as fonts macros and patterns are stored The printer has one default resource and one additional resource for each attached hard disk All downloaded objects are stored in file systems which reside on these resources The RAM1 resource may be used as the default but systems with at least one hard disk use the system disk instead So for any hard disk equipped printer all downloaded objects except palettes which require special handling are stored on disk The default resource and one of the additional resources can reside on the same hard disk but they will be located in different directories of that resource s file syste
151. consumables and electrostatic discharge How Consumables Affect Your Warranty The use of non QMS consumables and or accessories alone doesn t affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract you may have purchased However if a QMS printer failure or damage is found to be directly attributable to the use of non QMS Technical Specifications B 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B consumables and or accessories QMS will not repair the printer free of charge In this case standard time and material charges will be applied to service your printer for that particular failure or damage QMS recommends that you use only quality QMS consumables and accessories to support your printer To order QMS accessories in the US call 800 777 7782 In all other countries check appendix A QMS Customer Support for the QMS office closest to you How Electrostatic Discharge Affects Your Warranty Incidental and consequential damages caused by not discharging electrostatic buildup can affect your printer warranty Electrostatic discharge can destroy circuit boards such as a SIMM or your printer s controller board To prevent this use an antistatic wristband when handling printer circuit boards To use it attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient electrical ground for example the bare metal chassis of equipment as on the back of a computer that is plugged in but turned
152. d time period These pins protect and relieve tension on the belt and cleaning blade Replacing Consumables This section explains how to replace the consumables including toner developer OPC belt cartridges cleaning pad oil bottle and waste toner pack If you want to see illustrations of all the steps described in this section on replacing consumables see chapter 2 Tnitial Printer Setup NOTE When you see status messages including those regarding consumables you do not have to turn off the printer unless the message calls for service intervention Replacing a Toner Cartridge This section covers replacing a toner cartridge in your printer You should replace a toner cartridge when the x TONER EMPTY message displays in the message window on the control panel The x represents the color of the empty toner cartridge The industry standard for toner measurement is quoted at 5 coverage for letter or A4 size media NOTE Occasionally you may see the x TONER EMPTY message when there is still toner in the cartridge but the toner has merely settled so it can t distribute evenly This may happen if the printer sits without use for over several days If you think this may be the case remove the current cartridge shake it horizontally to redistribute the toner and place the cartridge back in the printer Then run a 6 4 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalbo
153. damaged envelopes E Store envelopes in a low humidity environment E Use only the envelope types specified in Media Handling in appendix B Technical Specifications Don t use envelopes with windows E If you re using the optional envelope cassette use it in the standard cassette slot not the optional feeder and don t place more than 30 envelopes in the cassette at once Internal Hard Disk Problems If you experience unexplained or erratic problems with the internal hard disk you may want to reformat the hard disk and reload the print system software See chapter 8 Printer Options for information Troubleshooting 9 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Miscellaneous Problems A Quick Check If you have justinstalled your printer and are having problems be sure you have correctly followed the setup steps outlined in chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup and chapter 3 Connecting the Printer Then check the following 1 Is there a status message in the control panel window If so go to question 2 If not check the following Is the power cord plugged into both the power outlet and the printer Are both power switches on Is the power outlet working Does the line voltage from the power outlet match the printer s power requirements See appendix B Technical Specifications Can you print a status page This option is located in the Administra
154. dex EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 CLOSE MANUAL FEED TRAY 9 1 CMS See Color management systems Collating Ch nk eg aces nte ELS 5 13 Disk Spaces 4 sss ee teeth 5 12 Collation 1 e oce ee ie Sask 4 54 5 12 Collation menu 4 18 5 12 Collation option 4 54 5 12 Color Compression 200005 7 11 Pantone chart 00 7 16 See also QCOLOR Registration 000 9 32 Separations 0 220 000 eee 4 19 Urneven i44 ssepe WM cnr 9 28 Color management 7 12 Color management systems 1 7 Color model Fullcolor eer 4 19 Monochrome 0 4 19 Color Model menu 4 19 Color rendering dictionaries 1 7 4 29 7 10 Business 4 eco RS ne 7 10 Colorimetric sienet TA es 7 10 Photographic lesse 7 10 See also Photographic Colorimetric Business Color Separation menu LLL 4 19 Golorimetric A ssepe E DT eR Re 7 11 Colorimetric CRD 4 29 7 10 Communication Between the printer and a Macintosh 3 3 Parallel oer teres ES 3 11 PG ania eee esu br Uds 3 17 Testing Macintosh 3 8 Festing PO opus pur Rd 3 17 Communications menu 4 21 AppleTalk option 4 26 Emul Timeout option 4 22 ESP Timeout option 4 22 Job Timeout option 4 22 Network Interface option
155. direct sunlight Do not remove the cartridge from its protective bag until you are ready to install it Limit exposure to light of 800 lux the average fluorescent lighting in an office to under 2 minutes If exposure exceeds this put the belt into a dark place like inside the printer to recover depending on exposure recovery may take up to 2 hours Also handle the belt cartridge carefully The belt is extremely sensitive to hand oils and scratches both of which will reduce print quality 2 Remove the OPC belt cartridge from its protective bag NOTE Be sure to save the protective bag to use during printer cleaning and maintenance when the OPC belt cartridge is out of the printer Initial Printer Setup 2 33 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 3 Remove the pressure release and tension release pin sets one set on the left and one on the right from the OPC belt cartridge fig 2 25 NOTE The pressure release and tension release pins protect the belt and its cleaning blade by relieving tension during shipment Save these pins to reinstall them if you need to ship the printer later Pressure Release Pin Tension Release Fin Fig 2 25 Remove the Release Pins 2 34 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 4 Make sure the green handle on the end of the OPC belt cartridge is turned up unlocked 5 Slide the cartridge thr
156. driver or application Because of these conversions a color output device like your printer may produce colors dramatically different from those seen on the computer screen or in the original image To keep colors more consistent you can use color management Color management involves two processes calibration and color matching Device Calibration Calibration ensures that the hardware of a targeted device produces consistent color every time Color Matching Even if you calibrate your color generating devices these devices still speak different color languages unless you have a color management system to translate between them Color matching uses software to describe colors for different devices in a common language to make sure that color is produced in the same shade on all devices Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 There are currently three methods of color matching m Color management systems E PostScript Level 2 m PANTONE Color matching Methods of Color Matching Color Matching with a CMS Color management systems CMSs work by translating color information from different devices into a common language A CMS first gets information about the way these devices create color and the range of colors they can produce This information is contained in device profiles Then using this information the CMS maps each device s color descriptions to the C
157. e information on QMS Automatic Color Control and color management systems Multiple Resolutions If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM you can print color or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or monochrome documents in 600 dpi You can print color and monochrome documents in 600 dpi if you install additional RAM in the printer The magicolor LX ships with either 120r 24 MB of RAM See appendix B Technical Specifications for specific information on RAM requirements and color resolution Software Loadable System SLS Your printer has a software loadable system SLS which allows you to replace or upgrade its system software from a host Future enhancements to the system software can be easily installed as they become available from QMS Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color and color reproduction materials Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Energy Saver Mode The magicolor LX printer s Energy Saver option allows it to automatically enter a lower power state after no print jobs have been received for a certain length of time which you define The Energy Star version of the magicolor LX printer look for an Energy Star labelon the back of the printer is compliant with US Environmental Protection Agency EPA Energy Star regulations The EPA Energy Enerji Star Computers program EPA POLLUTION PREVENTER promotes the use of energy efficient personal comp
158. e 61 3 899 5777 Sydney 61 2 901 3235 Tokyo 81 3 3437 4030 A 4 QMS Customer Support EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Print Engine Print Method Cyan magenta yellow and black electrophotographic recording with semiconductor laser Dry toner image transfer to print media Resolution The table below shows minimum RAM requirements for different page sizes and numbers of colors shaded areas indicate printing capabilities with the standard 12 MB RAM Page Size Dots per Minimum RAM Minimum Inch Monochrome RAM Four color Letter 300 12 MB 12 MB 600 12 MB 24 MB Legal 300 12 MB 16 MB 600 16 MB 28 MB A4 300 12 MB 12 MB 600 12 MB 24 MB Executive 300 12 MB 12 MB 600 12 MB 24 MB Envelopes 300 12 MB 12MB DL and Com 10 600 12 MB 20 MB Although the monochrome imageable area for legal sized pages is 8 11 x 13 61 205 90 mm x 345 60 mm the full color imageable region for this size is limited to 8 11 x 11 7 205 90 mm x 297 18 mm Technical Specifications B 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Print Speed Recom mended Duty Cycle Warm Up Time Noise Level Engine Switches Dimensions Weigh
159. e default ID of O is used Identifiers must be unique If the ID matches an ID for an existing object that object is deleted and replaced by the new object If a IncludeFeature remove command precedes a IncludeFeature install command the install command is ignored these two commands are mutually exclusive All downloaded objects are by default temporary and will be deleted at the end of a Additional Technical Information D 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D job unless Retain Temporary is set to On or On Compatibility If the file the IncludeFeature install command is attached to does not make its downloaded fonts permanent or Retain Temporary is not set then those objects are removed from the disk when the job completes downloaded font can be accessed only by its ID if the font is stored in the current resource Regardless of its resource a font can be selected by its attributes Example A shows a pair of jobs that will not produce the desired results subjob 2 has only the appearance of storing the font on disk By contrast examples B and C show a pair of jobs that will produce the desired results Example A Job 1 o oe oe IncludeFeature emulation pcl5 install 6 EndComments lt ESC gt s W lt download font header gt c33E s W lt char 33 data gt c34E N e oe oe s W lt char 34 data c5SF Example A Job 2 lt ESC gt 20Xthis text
160. e the formatting will be incorrect 7 When the format procedure is complete the following message momentarily displays FORMAT DISK FORMAT COMPLETE and then message window displays IDLE Formatting an External Hard Disk via PS Executive PS Executive Series Utilities offer formatting options for both Macintosh and PC setups See the README file on the PS Executive disk for information on installing the utilities and see the on line documentation for details on formatting disks Installing an Optional Card Font or Emulation To install optional fonts and emulations on a hard disk use the following procedure 1 Make sure the printer is off line Press the Menu key to display CONFIGURATION ADMINISTRATION 2 Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu then press the Next key to display ADMINISTRATION DISK OPERATIONS 3 Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations menu Press the Next key to display Printer Options 6 47 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 DISK OPERATIONS INSTALL OPTION Press the Select key to enter the Install Option submenu Press the Next key until the hard disk destination of the optional font or emulation displays in the message window Press Select to enter the destination Then press the Next key until the source of the optional font or emulation disp
161. e top Initial Printer Setup 2 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 7 Hold the toner cartridge as shown in figure 2 10 and shake it horizontally This distributes toner evenly inside the cartridge and helps assure quality printing Fig 2 10 Distribute Toner in Cartridge 2 16 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 8 Hold and squeeze the toner cartridge across the center fig 2 11 and align it with the developer cartridge of the same color Make sure the pins on the back side of the toner cartridge line up with the notches on the developer cartridge CAUTION Never force a toner cartridge onto the wrong developer cartridge Not only will this damage the cartridges but also the pressure can damage the printer 9 Lower the toner cartridge until it fits firmly onto the notches on the developer cartridge fig 2 11 Fig 2 11 Align Cartridges rear view Initial Printer Setup 2 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 10 Press the top of the toner cartridge until the cartridge latches securely in place 11 Grasp the tab on the top of the toner cartridge 12 Hold the toner cartridge in place with one hand as you pull the tab and attached clear tape straight up and completely out of the cartridge fig 2 12 using the other hand Then discard the tab and tape Fig 2 12 Remove Sealing
162. eady exist Open the PPDs folder inside the Drivers folder in the PSExec 3 xx Folder Open the Ver 4 1 folder inside the PPDs folder Select the magicolor LX PPD in the Ver 4 1 folder and drag it to the Printer Descriptions folder you created in step 4 From the Apple menu choose Chooser In the Chooser window select the LaserWriter 8 x icon and select the QMS magicolor LX Choose the Setup button This causes the LaserWriter to query the printer and automatically choose the appropriate PPD Exit the Chooser Now when you go into your application you can access QMS printing options like QCOLOR color control by choosing Options in your application s Print dialog box For information on the printer specific features in the Options dialog box see chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output Note for Users of Aldus Applications If you use an Aldus application when you want to print hold down the Option key while selecting Print from the File menu This brings up the LaserWriter window which contains the QMS printing options like QCOLOR color control Normally Aldus applications bypass LaserWriter and use an Aldus printer driver which would prevent you from accessing QMS color printing options Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Note for Adobe Photoshop Users If you use Adobe PhotoShop go to PhotoShop s Page Setup dialog box and select Use Printer
163. eature header Trailer pages IncludeFeature trailer Header Trailer Information Commands Application used Creator Copyright statement CopyRight Current date Date Date and time created CreationDate Host computer Host Owner For Routing information Routing Title Title Version and revision N ersion 4 56 Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 HP GL Emulation Features Commands Enhanced mode Expanding plots Original paper size Pen width and color selection Plotter selection Reverse image Scaling plots Shifting origin IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature 9o9oIncludeFeature 9o9oIncludeFeature IncludeFeature enhanced expand size pen plotter reverse scaling origin HP PCL Emulation Features Commands Carriage returns Font selection Font by id Font storage Line feeds Lines per inch Point size Remove from disk Reset to defaults Symbol set Retain temporary macros fonts Select monochrome Enable scalable fonts IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature 9o9oIncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature YIncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature criscrlf font fontid resource Ifiscrlf linesperinch pointsize remove res
164. ed previously fig 8 13 N J MM a Fig 8 13 Reinstall the Controller Board 3 Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord and then turn on the printer Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Single In Line Memory Modules SIMMs Additional printer memory allows you to increase data transfer and processing speed To install SIMMs 1 Follow the instructions in Removing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to discharge electrostatic buildup before you begin Turn the controller board so that the side where the SIMMs are located is closest to you and the SIMMs are located on your right side If there are enough open connectors for the additional SIMMs you are installing skip to step 6 However if you need to remove existing SIMMs to make space for new ones follow the instructions in steps 4 and 5 If you need to remove a SIMM to make room for larger memory SIMMs Use the clips located on each side of the connector to gently release the SIMM CAUTION If you are removing SIMMs remember that printer Operation requires at least 12 MB of total memory with at least 4 MB of that memory in the slot closest to the center of the board Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 5 Tilt the SIMM back to a 45 angle and slide it up and out of the connector fig 8 14 Fig
165. edgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 within these menus are seldom changed after the initial system installation Administration Communications ADMINISTRATION COMMUNICATIONS un p Select Previous Next lt COMMUNICATIONS a 2x Optional TIMEOUTS COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK INTERFACE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS APPLETALK PARALLEL Fig 4 6 Communications Submenu NOTE If you have an optional interface installed see the documentation that came with it for a description of options under the Administration Communications menu Administration Communications Timeouts The Timeouts option sets a limit to the amount of time the printer waits on transmission from the host for various types of data Setting a timeout to 00000 is the same as specifying no timeout PS Wait The number of seconds that PostScript emulation mode Timeout waits for incoming data from 00000 no timeout to Printer Configuration 4 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 99999 with a factory default of 00030 Tf the printer goes idle after 30 seconds and does not print this timeout should be increased Large jobs such as graphics applications or computer aided design require this number to be increased to 00300 Note When a print job is sent from a Macintosh the PS Wait timeout is auto
166. ee of such things as folds tears or wrinkles Fan the paper fig 2 31 to prevent the sheets from sticking together Align the edges of the stack on a flat surface Fig 2 31 Fan the Paper Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 5 Load the paper printing side up in the cassette top end first for letterhead or preprinted media Printing on the wrong side may reduce print quality Make sure the paper lies flat and does not exceed the upper limit mark on the cassette for foil transparencies or paper fig 2 32 Overloading the cassette can cause a jam Fig 2 32 Load the Paper 6 Adjust the paper guides on each side and on the trailing edge ofthe media so that they rest lightly against the media without causing it to buckle Initial Printer Setup 2 41 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 7 Slide the filled cassette into the printer fig 2 33 until it snaps firmly into place and is flush with the front of the printer A Fig 2 33 Slide the Cassette into the Printer 2 42 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Starting the Printer After you have unpacked the printer and installed the consumables you need to connect the power cord and turn on the two power switches Connecting the Power Cord The power connector is on the
167. ee quarters of the way into the printer until the notches on each side of the bottom rest on the lip of the manual feed tray fig 2 26 Fig 2 26 Slide Cartridge Partially into Printer Initial Printer Setup 2 35 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 6 Remove the black light shield paper from the OPC belt by pulling the tab on the front as shown in figure 2 27 and pulling the paper straight out of the printer NOTE If the light shield paper doesn t slide out easily or if it should begin to tear pull the OPC belt cartridge a little farther out of the printer and try again Light Shield Paper Fig 2 27 Remove the Light Shield Paper 2 36 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 7 Firmly slide the cartridge the rest of the way into the printer until it snaps into place It is in place when you can see the green arrows inside the metal frame of the printer 8 Turn the green end handle on the cartridge down to close it and lock the cartridge in place 9 Close the manual feed tray fig 2 28 SZ CoS ES ES Manual Feed Tray Fig 2 28 Close the Manual Feed Tray Initial Printer Setup 2 37 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Filling the Paper Cassette Instructions are given here for loading and printing on letter or A4 size paper Chapter 5 Print Medi
168. eed Transparency L Online Offline Tray j zx E Select Previous Fig 4 1 Printer Control Panel Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 The LCD Message Window This message window presents status messages and Configuration menu options When you re in the Configuration menu the top line of the message window displays the name of the current menu and the bottom line displays the name of an option within that menu Status messages display in order of priority if the printer is on line they don t display if the printer is off line Chapter 9 Troubleshooting lists and explains status messages Use the Clear Warning option to clear a status message that doesn t automatically clear after the related corrective action is taken See Administration Engine Clear Warning later in this chapter for details The Control Panel LEDs The LEDs Light Emitting Diodes on the control panel give information about printer status Online Illuminated when the printer is on line ready to accept and process new print jobs Data O Flashes when the printer is receiving data from one or more of the simultaneous interfaces Message h Illuminated when the printer requires operator intervention Standard Illuminated w
169. efon 96333500 Chapter 7 Helvetica Condensed Helvetica Condensed Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Script ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Pi Symbol ITC Zapf Dingbats Optimizing Color Output 7 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 The Resident HP PCL Fonts The following typefaces are included with your printer for use with the HP PCL emulation Courier 1O is 1O point 12 pitch Courier 12 is 12 point 1O pitch The Courier and Lineprinter fonts are bitmapped the others are scalable The default is Courier 12 Courier 10 Medium Courier 10 Bold Courier 10 Italic Medium Courier 12 Medium Courier 12 Bold Courier 12 Italic Medium Line Printer Medium 8 5 point 16 66 pitch Linotype Times Roman Medium Linotype Times Roman Italic Medium Linotype Times Roman Bold Linotype Times Roman Italic Bold Linotype Univers Medium Linotype Univers Italic Medium Linotype Univers Bold Linotype Univers Italic Bold Linotype Univers Condensed Medium Linotype Univers Condensed Italic Medium Linotype Univers Condensed Bold Linotype Univers Condensed Italic Bold ITC Zapf Dingbats Medium 7 20 Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Printer Options Chapter highlights Installing the optional sheet feeder Using
170. equired for this procedure VENNA Your printer weighs approximately 106 Ibs 48 kg without consumables Be sure to have help when lifting and moving it If consumables are installed be sure to keep the printer level when moving it to prevent accidental spills Printer Options amp 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Das Gewicht dieses Druckers betr gt ohne Ver brauchsmaterial ca 48 kg Bitte versuchen Sie niemals den Drucker alleine anzuheben oder zu transportieren Achten Sie bitte darauf dab der Drucker mit eingebauten Tonerkar tuschen nur waagerecht transportiert wird 1 Turn the printer off remove the power cord and disconnect all interface cables from the printer 2 With the help of another person pick up the printer by the four corners and align it above the sheet feeder fig 8 1 3 Keeping the printer level lower it onto the sheet feeder fig 8 1 The bottom side edges of the printer rest inside the sides of the sheet feeder Fig 8 1 Lower Printer onto the Sheet Feeder 4 Install the two small metal brackets using the following procedure a Alignoneofthe metal brackets with the outside of the metal post on the front right side of the sheet feeder fig 8 2 Make sure Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 the holes on the post and bracket are centered and that the flange on the bottom of the bracket goes into t
171. er Board Printer Options 8 29 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Hold the plastic ribbon cable so that the notch key on one end faces upward and slide it onto the interface card connector fig 8 19 Fold the plastic ribbon cable over so that the notch key on the other end is facing to the right and slide it into the controller board connector to the left of the network interface card You may have to open the ejector latches on the connectors to be able to connect the ribbon cable Fig 8 19 Connect Both Ends of the Cable Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 7 Examine the ends of the two plastic support posts that come with the daughterboard one end has a slightly larger diameter and the other end is slightly more tapered Insert the larger ends into the controller board 8 Attach the daughterboard to the two support posts and the two 48 pin connectors fig 8 20 The daughterboard is keyed so that it fits only one way Fig 8 20 Attach the Daughterboard to Support Posts 9 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to eliminate static electricity 10 If your interface kit came with an external power supply box attach it to the round connector next to the network interface port then connect the box to a power cord and plug the power cord into an electrical outle
172. er Feed Roller and the Manual Feed Belts Cleaning the Exterior of Your Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance Chapter 7 Chapter Optimizing Color Output Introduction 0 a an E DATAS QCOLOR Automatic Color Control Enabling QCOLOR for Windows Enabling QCOLOR for the Macintosh Fine Tuning Color Output 04 Printer Default Halftone Settings Dither Pattern zo Rand Gamma Correction 0 00 esee Printer Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries Color Management lessen Device Calibration 0002 eee Color Matching 0 0 eee eee Methods of Color Matching Color Matching witha CMS Color Matching with PostScript Level 2 PANTONE Color Matching The Resident PostScript Fonts The Resident HP PCL Fonts Printer Options Introduction 0 0 0 cece eee a R The Sheet Feeder 0 0 cee ee eee eee Installing the Sheet Feeder Using the Envelope Cassette 04 Font and Emulation Cards 04 Using Font and Emulation Cards Security Cards icis see ERU REESE Using a Security Card ouuo Removing the Controller Board
173. er client whichever asks for it first This is the best place for it for most users but it can be reallocated to other memory clients Keep in mind though that misallocating memory may hinder printer performance and that the printer engine s fastest speed is Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 3 pages per minute for 2 or 3 color jobs 2 pages per minute for 4 color and 8 pages per minute for black and white no matter how you configure the memory If you try to seta memory client below a minimum required value or above a maximum allowable value the message INCORRECT VALUE appears in the message window Administration Memory K Mem for Spool This is the amount of RAM KB dedicated to the spooling buffers Incoming print job data is stored in this memory client until it is processed and printed The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system Also see the Administration Disk Operations Spool Overflow later in this section Administration Memory K Mem for PSHeap This is the amount of RAM KB dedicated to the PostScript emulation interpreter This memory holds downloaded PostScript emulation fonts operators and forms The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system This memory client is also known as virtual memory Administration Memory K Mem PS Fonts This is the
174. er to reset and lose information previously downloaded to RAM Make sure you have enough printer memory for the additional fonts Additional memory RAM is available and easily installed Contact your QMS vendor for information on RAM upgrades See chapter 8 Printer Options On an AppleTalk network Macintosh computers sometimes interfere with each other If this happens often check all the Macintosh computers on the network to make sure they are using the same version of LaserWriter and Laser Prep If neither of these files is the problem contact your QMS vendor No Start up Page If no start up page prints check the following Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Ta Chapter 9 Is the printer on line Has the start up page been disabled Check the Do Start Page option in the Administration Startup Options menu to make sure the start up page is on If the start up page is turned on go to step 3 Turn the printer off then back on It takes approximately 4 minutes for the printer to warm up from a cold start or less than a minute from a warm start Be sure you wait long enough for a start up page to print before suspecting a problem Check to be sure the media cassette is in place and secure Check for a media jam See Clearing Media Jams earlier in this chapter for details Make sure all toner and developer cartridges are installed and not depleted Make sure the fu
175. erflow 00 4 53 CLOWN i aie eon rne wd 1 10 Spool Overflow option D 10 Spool timeout serial interface 4 23 SPOONS s Ada More eer ATA wane 1 10 Standard Upper LED 4 4 Start Up page 0 0 0000 2 44 Disabhing 5 see ne eee Da nds 5 20 Troubleshooting 9 24 I 16 Startup options 000 4 39 Startup Options menu 4 39 Do Error Handler option 4 40 Do Start Page option 4 40 Do Sys Start option 4 40 Static electricity See Electrostatic discharge Status Printen noca ane et TS DO 2 45 5 19 Status Messages us e ea esee ese 4 4 100K checkup 000 9 4 Adjust xxxxx bin esses 9 1 Back panel open 9 1 Belt cartridge misinstalled 9 1 Cancelling job 9 1 Check waste toner 6 14 9 1 Close manual feed tray 9 1 Consumables iee aran Bealo nes a 6 4 Control panel ue ue eo 9 1 Dey low nors ated HUES Mente edet 6 7 9 1 Developer unit misinstalled 9 2 Fuser oil empty 9 2 Fuser oil lows cu eo 6 12 9 2 General hones oe dnd Nee barges 9 1 Idle edite oe etre A Geeta 9 2 Idle input printing Lus 9 2 Initializing 0 000 9 2 Inner Jam rene ee intra dine Se Rs 9 2 Message window 4 4 9 1 Misfeed jam 0000 9 3
176. ermine if and how you need to reallocate printer memory read the descriptions of the different memory clients in the sections that follow The Memory Clients The memory clients can be set up from the Administration Memory menu of the printer s Configuration menu Each time you make changes in the Memory menu print a status page in the Administration Special Pages menu to confirm the memory reallocation When you allocate memory to a specific client through the control panel it is allocated in kilobytes KB The sizes listed on the status page are in bytes so you must divide the numbers on the status page by 1024 to get the equivalent number of kilobytes entered through the control panel NOTE The value for each memory client must be evenly divisible by 4 KB if a value is entered that is not evenly divisible by 4 KB itis automatically converted to the next lower value that is divisible by 4 KB For example if you enter 102 KB the actual value is lowered to 100 KB assuming there is enough memory available to allocate to this client The amount shown on the status page will then be 102 400 100 x 1024 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Frame Buffer Listed as K Mem Framebuff in the Administration Memory menu the frame buffer memory client holds rasterized bitmapped images of page faces that are ready to be sent to the physical print engine Your QMS p
177. et symbolset retaintemporary monochromegl scalablefonts Establish resource def object ID IncludeFeature install Indicates a DOC about which updated information is provided in appendix D Additional Technical Information Lineprinter Emulation Features Commands Automatic text wrap Carriage returns Font selection Form feed Line feeds Lines per page Printer Configuration IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature IncludeFeature autowrap criscrlf font ffiscrff Lfiscrlf linesperpage EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Map using ASCII or EBCDIC 2o96IncludeFeature map Margins folncludeFeature Ipmargins Number on for 5 digit numbers IncludeFeature number Orientation 9o926IncludeFeature Iporientation Point size IncludeFeature pointsize Tabs selection IncludeFeature tabs PostScript Emulation Features Commands Choose Level 1 or 2 ncludeFeature languagelevel Default dither pattern IncludeFeature ditherdefault Printer Features Commands Collating print jobs ncludeFeature collate Color model selection IncludeFeature colormodel Color separations ncludeFeature colorseparation Copies number of ncludeFeature numcopies Emulation selection IncludeFeature emulation Media type selection IncludeFeature mediatype Orientation selection IncludeFeature orientat
178. ette which is interchangeable with the standard cassette Can be used in the standard media cassette slot or the optional sheet feeder LNO3 Plus CCITT HP ProCollection System Administrator Security Card Dataproducts Short line Conversion Kit External Hard Disk Internal Hard Disk Kanji Typeface Hard Disk Kit Ethernet Interface Token Ring Interface Optional Documentation LAN Manager LAN Server DECnet TCP IP NetWare EtherTalk LAN Manager LAN Server TCP IP NetWare QMS Crown Document Option Commands QMS Crown Network Notes HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference QMS Crown Technical Reference Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B SIMMs Memory 4 MB Upgrade Kit 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB Electrical SV 10 Fast page mode tras 80 ns teas 20 ns trac 80 ns tcac 20 ns Mechanical 72 pin industry standard package 1 high tin plated contacts Size 4 MB 1M x 32 8 MB 2M x 32 16 MB 4M x 32 32 MB 8M x 32 You can get information on which SIMMs and hard disks are compatible with your printer from Q FAX See appendix A QMS Customer Support for information on using Q FAX Ask for Q FAX document 6502 QMS tested SIMMs and Hard Disks Warranty Considerations You should read your printer warranty carefully and be sure to store it in a safe place Various factors can affect a printer s warranty Two important ones are
179. f information from QMS Appendix A Introduction 1 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 QMS Customer Support of this manual explains how to use these sources Don t forget that the documentation for your application operating system and network probably contains useful printing information Typographic Conventions Mixed Case Courier Mixed Case Italic Courier UPPERCASE COURIER lowercase bold lowercase italic UPPERCASE d X Text you type and messages and information displayed on the computer monitor Variable text you type replace the italicized word s with information specific to your printer or workstation Information displayed in the printer message window PostScript operators Variable information in text and PostScript variables File and utility names Press the Enter key PC or Return key Macintosh Press and hold down the Ctrl key PC while you type the following letter NOTE Notes contain tips extra information or important information that deserves emphasis or reiteration CAUTION Cautions present information that you need to know to avoid equipment damage or extreme annoyance WARNING Warnings indicate the possibility of personal in jury if a procedure is not performed exactly as described in the manual Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 aec Bitte halten Sie sich ex
180. figure your printer s memory just because you have the ability to printer memory is configured at the factory to provide optimal performance in most printing environments Remember that the engine s maximum speed is about 8 pages per minute for a letter or A4 size monochrome page no matter how much memory is installed NOTE To reset all factory defaults in the Configuration menu use the restore defaults option in the Administration Miscellaneous menu You can also reset all factory defaults by simultaneously holding down the Select and Online Offline keys for about 10 seconds while turning the printer off and on again The reset process takes several minutes to complete Memory Management There is no single correct way for everyone to allocate printer memory The factory default configuration might be the best for your environment Or for example if you use a large number of PostScript fonts of various point sizes you might want to increase the amount of memory allocated to the memory client dedicated to Additional Technical Information D 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D PostScript fonts Each of your printer s features requires a minimum amount of memory If you use a feature you must allocate enough memory to the client that controls it but if there are features you do not use you can move excess memory from unused features to other clients that need additional memory To det
181. g telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Fig 2 2 Unpacking the Printer Initial Printer Setup 2 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 3 Before you begin setup take a few minutes to look over figures 2 3 and 2 4 They provide a quick overview of the exterior parts of your printer Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Control Panel T SS A 7 A P a T PF Function Keye Manual Menu Keys Feed Tray Kidged Finger Se Grips Paper Feed Remote Power Cassette Switch Fig 2 3 Front View of the Printer Control Panel Top Cover Interface Port il A Paper Exit Main Power Unit Switch Waste Toner Pack Cover Back Cover Power Connector Fig 2 4 Back View of the Printer Initial Printer Setup 2 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 4 Remove the two polystyrene inserts from the top cover of the printer 5 Remove all packing tape from the exterior of the printer 6 Grasp the front end of the top cover and lift it up to remove it fig 2 5 Then set the cover aside for now Fig 2 5 Remove the Top Cover front view 7 Remove the two polystyrene shipping spacers from inside the printer 2 10 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Installing Developer and Toner Cartridges When you lo
182. g telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Changing Print Job Resolution You can configure the printer to use either 600 or 300 dpi resolution This can be done through your application if its driver supports this option such as the QMS provided Macintosh or Windows driver or through the printer front panel see chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM you can print color or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or monochrome documents in 600 dpi To print monochrome documents in 600 dpi with 12 MB RAM in addition to configuring the printer for 600 dpi resolution you must also configure it for monochrome printing This can be done through your application or through the printer front panel Administration Engine Default Resolution and Operator Control Color Model menus To print color documents in 600 dpi you must install additional RAM in the printer See appendix B Technical Specifications for specific information on RAM requirements and color resolution Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Adjusting Print Density Normally your laser printer produces a rich black or color image However you may occasionally notice a coloris printing a bitlight or dark In this case you may want to increase the print density or contrast setting for that color NOTE Changing the print density affects the resident colo
183. g fine detail with no banding rosettes or moir s The enhanced halftone has an effective line screen of up to 95 Ipi at 600 dpi with 161 halftone gray levels which allows the printer to produce up to 4 2 million colors Choose this halftone setting in the following situations E If your jobs contain a mixture of text graphics and or sampled images E If you are using the Pantone POCE or Apple ColorSync color management system or if you are producing PANTONE simulations W For optimum color matching when using a printer resident Color Rendering Dictionary Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials Optimizing Color Output 7 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 106 Ipi x 45 Halftone This is the best halftone setting for printing halftone as opposed to spot color graphics and text at 600 dpi resolution We recommend that you select Gammal06 gamma correction when using this halftone see Gamma Correction later in this chapter for information 71 lpi x 45 Halftone This setting minimizes visible gradations banding at 600 dpi but provides less detail than the 106 lpi x 45 halftone setting We recommend that you select Gamma71 gamma correction when using this halftone see Gamma Correction below for information 80 Ipi x 45 Halftone This halftone setting optimizes halftone as opposed to spot color
184. g firmly on the corners not the center with one hand while steadying the board with the other hand as you snap the disk in place 7 Make sure no other components on the board shifted or loosened during the installation procedure especially the SIMMs and any optional interface boards 8 Follow the instructions in Replacing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to eliminate static electricity Printer Options 8 41 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 If the printer fails to work properly after you replace the hard disk check the following m Make sure the power cord and all interface cables are connected correctly and tightly and that the printer power is on m Make sure that you didn t miss any pins when you reattached the ribbon cable no pins should be exposed B Make sure no other components shifted or loosened during the installation procedure especially the SIMMs and any optional interface boards If you ve checked all of the above and the printer still doesn t work properly see appendix A QMS Customer Support for information on how to contact us 8 42 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Using External Hard Disks In addition to the internal hard disk your printer supports up to six optional external hard disks through its SCSI port When an external hard disk is connected to the printer
185. g is 0 and the maximum is 1700 The default is 0 Administration Emulations HP GL Fifteen configuration choices are available The QMS Crown Technical Reference an optional manual available from your QMS vendor has more information on HP GL Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Plotter Scaling Percent Origin Reverse Image Enhanced Mode Expand Mode Paper Type Pens 1 8 Choices include 7550A the factory default 7475A 7470A and ColorPro Choices range from 1 to 150 percent of the original size The default is 100 percent NOTE To scale plots select the paper size originally used for the plot in the Paper Type menu then enter the reduction or enlargement needed to fit the plot on the new page in the Scaling Percent menu If necessary enter new x y coordinates in the Origin menu to reposition the plot on the page Choices range from O to 850 to the right x direction and 0 to 1 100 upward y direction in 001 increments In normal orientation the 0 0 origin point is the lower left corner when the page is viewed in landscape orientation of the imageable area The default values are 0000 in the x direction and 0000 in the y direction This option applies only to monochrome printing Choices are off black on a white background and on white on a black background The default is off This option allows you to choose enhanced resolution f
186. guration values to their factory defaults by simultaneously holding down the and Online Offline keys for about 10 seconds while turning the printer off and on again Administration Miscellaneous Permanent Change If setto off this option prevents a print job from making permanent Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 configuration changes to the printer s non volatile memory PS Executive Series Utilities the host software that comes with your printer is an example of a program that generates print jobs to change the printer s non volatile memory where printer defaults are stored Non volatile means data in this memory remains even if the printer is turned off and back on Setting this option to on allows print jobs to change the non volatile memory The choices are on and off the factory default is off Administration Miscellaneous Keypad Language This option allows you to set the language in the message window to English French German or Spanish The factory default message window language is English Changing the keypad language will cause the printer to re initialize automatically Printer Configuration 4 51 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Disk Operations This menu fig 4 13 controls the internal hard disk as well as any optional hard disk s attached to the printer s SCSI port See chapter 8 Printer O
187. h des as IRE 4 18 Index M dia 5e Stee bine tee gue args 4 17 Orientation llle esee 4 18 Password i i cca Se tole eda eene 4 15 Operator Passwrd menu 4 15 Optional Lower LED 4 4 Optional accessories CATdS user tii oh Vene de OH LO Dataproducts conversions 8 33 Emulation cards 8 10 8 47 8 48 Font cards 8 10 8 47 8 48 Network interface 8 26 Security card 000005 8 13 Sheet feeder sa ou ve AO 8 1 SIMMS stus wend noone ean hea 8 22 Optional cards 04 8 10 Optional features configuration 4 54 Options 1 5 8 1 8 28 B 8 oi sidan a Soe ei vile belgian HLS Collation 0 4 54 5 12 Dataproducts conversion kit B 8 Documentation B 8 Emulation cards 1 13 Ethernet interface B 8 Font cards 1 13 Fh ard disks 2 vete pa cases ose 1 13 Installing 0 2 46 4 53 Memoty sore venda tas ener hes B 9 Network interfaces 1 13 4 28 Printer s DA hme ia 1 12 Removing 2 eee ee 4 53 Security card 1 11 8 13 B 8 SIMMS h eana aee endo ay prt gere B 9 Spool overflow 4 4 53 Startups e eie wees ese 4 39 Token Ring interface B 8 Updated lists s sidi sepuni eini rrera B 8 Warranty considerations B 10 Orientation Media
188. h settings or send software commands to accommodate different printer emulations ESP mode is an option for the printer s LocalTalk serial and parallel interfaces Factory Default The printer settings that are programmed into the printer at the factory These settings can be changed through the printer control panel or overridden with printer commands sent through software See also default Imageable Region The areas of a page size a printer can access determined by hardware limits physical page size and margins required by the printer engine and software constraints amount of memory available for the full page frame buffer Also referred to as imageable area and printable region Interface The place where a physical connection is made between components such as a cable and printer and communication or signals are passed back and forth Laser Paper Paper designed for laser printing Laser paper allows the richest color and black and white output and the most consistent coverage especially for large areas of one color It is best for prepress proofs For laser paper printing we recommend Hammermill Laser Print Laser paper has a printable side and a non printable side usually the printable side is indicated by an arrow on the side of the wrapping covering the media and that side is slightly smoother See also plain paper Manual Feed Feeding single sheets of print media to the printer by hand as opposed to letting the printer
189. hapter for details Printer Options 6 45 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Formatting an External Hard Disk via the Control Panel Use the following procedure to format an external hard disk using the printer s control panel NOTE If the FORMAT FAILED message displays in the message window during the Format Disk operation the disk cannot be used Press the Menu key to remove the message and contact your printer vendor 1 With the printer off line the Online LED is off press the Menu and Next keys to display the message ADMINISTRATION DISK OPERATIONS 2 Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations menu Then if necessary press the Next key to display the message DISK OPERATIONS FORMAT DISK 3 Press the Select key to enter the Format Disk submenu 4 Press the Next key until the address of the hard disk you want to format displays in the message window then press the Select key 5 When you are prompted ARE YOU SURE NO press the Next key to display the message E YOU SURE S AR YE 6 Press the Select key to start the format procedure Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 CAUTION During the formatting procedure various messages may appear the printer automatically restarts and the control panel lights flash Do not interrupt this process becaus
190. hat is automatically assigned by the printer when the font is downloaded This index number may change if new resources are added but in practice it usually remains fixed All currently available PCL fonts resident cartridge temporary permanent and external are listed with their font index numbers on the Advanced Status Page The font index number defines the default PCL font to be used if selectbyid is specified as the default PCL font Do not confuse the font index with the PCL font ID a mechanism used to identify downloaded fonts in the PCL language using the lt ESC gt X sequence There is no way to specify fonts by their font index numbers from within the PCL language Only the default PCL font is affected Object There are three types of PCL downloaded objects temporary permanent and external Temporary objects reside on the current resource and they are deleted either at the beginning and end of a job unless Retain Temporary is set to On or On Compatibility or when the system is reset lt ESC gt E or receipt of Printer Job Language Permanent objects reside on the current resource and Additional Technical Information D 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D are retained when the system is reset E or receipt of Printer Job Language External objects reside on the additional resources All objects are temporary when first created They can be made permanent objects through PCL
191. he message YES IS SELECT displays briefly Then CANCELLING JOB ED displays until the job currently printing or compiling data is removed from the printer Sending an End of Job Indicator To send an end of job indicator to the currently compiling job if WAITING FOR INPUT END JOB Print Media and Daily Operations 5 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 displays in the message window use the following procedure NOTE Selecting End Job won t end a job thatis still receiving data Its only purpose is to provide an end of job indicator for jobs that do not have one 1 Press the Cancel key The following message displays in the message window CANCELLING JOB YES 2 Press the Next key The following message displays CANCELLING JOB END JOB 3 Press the Select or Cancel key to confirm that jobs waiting for input are ended 5 18 Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Diagnostic and Special Pages There may be times when you want to check the current status of your printer adjust the quality of your printed copy or monitor print jobs To help you do this the printer has several types of diagnostic and special pages These include the start up page status pages standard and advanced the registration and sample pages
192. he fuser to ensure print quality and reduce wear on your printer ECKUP and the REPLACE FUSER messages can be cleared through the Clear Warning option in the Administration Engine menu Then you can continue to use the printer See Administration Engine in chapter 4 for details on clearing the warning CAUTION W replaced or the e strongly recommend that you have the fuser 100 000 copy checkup done as soon as possible after a message appears If you clear one of these messages the Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 counter that tracks that particular service resets to O and the mes sage does not reappear until after another complete cycle If you continue to use the printer without the proper maintenance or part replacement print quality can deteriorate and the wear on the printer can shorten the printer s life Troubleshooting 9 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Clearing Media Jams When a jam occurs the message window on the control panel displays one of three messages MISFEED JAM INNER JAM or OUTER JAM The following sections contain procedures for clearing each type of jam Clearing Misfeed Jams When the control panel message window displays MISFEED JAM media has jammed while leaving the media cassette or the manual feed tray To clear this jam use the f
193. he imageable area for the page size you re using the printer may be out of alignment See The Status Pages in chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for information on checking printer alignment Troubleshooting 9 31 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Color Jobs or Portions of Jobs Print in Monochrome B Make sure you have enough RAM installed for the job you are trying to print See appendix B Technical Specifications for a chart showing RAM requirements for different page sizes and numbers of colors E If you re printing legal sized pages note that there are different imageable areas for black and color printing See Media Handling section of Appendix B Technical Specifications Colors Not Registering Properly W Check to make sure the printer is on a hard level surface m Check for damage to the OPC belt cartridge Replace it if necessary Smudges on the Back of Pages E Make sure the size key on the media cassette is set to the right size for each job Smudges can occur if the wrong size was selected on the previous job causing the image to print off the side of the page onto the transfer roller If this happens run a few more pages through the printer to clean off the remaining toner Dark Vertical Lines m Check the OPC belt cartridge Something may be caught under the cleaning blade or the cartridge may need to be replaced Install a new OPC
194. he oil bottle and drain the oil from the unit E Replace the pressure release pieces See the sections on replacing the toner developer and OPC belt cartridges earlier in this chapter and the Removing and Replacing Pressure Release Pieces section later in this chapter for details CAUTION Make sure the OPC belt cartridge is protected while it is not in the printer The belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights and direct sunlight Limit exposure to 800 lux the average fluores cent lighting in an office of light to under 2 minutes If exposure exceeds this put the belt in a dark place to recover depending on exposure recovery may take up to 2 hours Also handle the OPC belt cartridge carefully by either the two green side handles or by the green handle on the end The belt is extremely sensitive to hand oils and scratches both of which reduce print quality When you Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter must setit down gently lay it on a clean lint and dirt free surface such as on fresh paper During the move store the partially used toner and developer cartridges in their original shipping bags If you do not have these bags wrap the cartridges in pieces of sturdy cloth or plastic that cannot be harmed by loose residue Carefully wrap the OPC belt cartridge in a piece of dark heavy cloth and place itin a safe place where it will not get sc
195. he slot on the post b Attach the bracket to the post using one of the two small metal screws that came with the sheet feeder fig 8 2 c Align and attach the second metal bracket to the rear left sheet feeder post in the same way as you did the first bracket fig 8 2 Metal Bracket Rear Left Metal Bracket Front Right Fig 8 2 Install the Metal Brackets Printer Options 8 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 5 Check the inside of the four plastic corner brackets Each is labeled to indicate which corner of the sheet feeder it fits in 6 Snap the plastic brackets onto the appropriate corners of the sheet feeder fig 8 3 These brackets have small rims on the bottom that fit inside the edges of the sheet feeder Rear Left Rear Right g Front Left Front Right A g Top View Fig 8 3 Attach the Corner Brackets The sheet feeder is now installed See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for information on handling media and filling cassettes NOTE Ifyou move the printer with the sheet feeder attached lift the unit by the four bottom corners not by the sheet feeder s cassette slot Before moving the printer be sure to read Moving the Printer in chapter 6 8 4 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Using the Envelope Cassette
196. hen the standard paper cassette is Upper selected Optional Illuminated when the optional lower cassette is selected Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Manual ft Feed Paper Transparency Chapter 4 Illuminated when manual feed is selected using the Tray Select key Illuminated when the media in the active cassette has been defined to be paper Illuminated when the media in the active cassette has been defined to be transparency All the LEDs except Data and Message are associated with function keys on the panel The Function Keys The printer control panel has eight function keys The top row of keys Online Offline Tray Select Media Cancel is for frequently used operations The bottom row of keys is used to navigate menus select options and enter values NOTE When you re in configuration mode that is if you have entered the menu by pressing the Menu key the printer ignores the Tray Select Media and Cancel keys Pressing the Online Offline key once takes the printer off line making the printer ready for configuration When the printer goes off line communication ports close and accept no new data Although jobs continue to compile and print using data already received a job may be interrupted when the printer goes off line causing it to wait forthe rest of the data before finishing printing
197. ia menu 4 17 Selection ose d bee TERES 4 17 See Thick stock Helvetica eer e RETE 7 18 Helvetica Condensed 7 19 Helvetica Narrow 7 19 Hexdump 4 22 4 25 B 2 Sel cting ie ee atch Ga VS 4 22 4 25 Index Horizontal lines Shatp cid cng de veo eine AA 9 33 Host Input de da TA DA Ga eere D S Host input buffer See K Mem for Spool Hot ports See SIO HP PCL Technical reference 1 5 4 33 Typefaces oss sve Ad bees 7 20 HP PCL 5 Technical Reference 1 5 4 33 B 8 HP PCE SC ita ete veu LE 1 12 B 2 Default fonte ua 4 33 Default Font Index 4 34 Download Location 4 35 Line Termination 4 34 Lines per inch 4 33 Monochrome GL 2 4 34 Options opta Mewes veg neler 4 33 Point S126 22d PODO 4 34 Retain Temporary 4 34 Scalable Fonts 04 4 34 Selecting 3 TA AA eda kas 4 22 4 25 Symbol setir soewe a gei 4 33 HP PCL SC technical notes 1 5 HP GE es rey eher Meets 3 23 B 2 Emulation 6 33s 09 AA ENS 1 12 Enhanced mode 4 32 Expand mode sie ante 4 32 Option do AA A oboe wees heed 4 31 Orig aes aor AE ADO 4 32 Paper type meesi donrn AO 4 32 Pens 128 5 ss chee ehe o 4 32 Plotter a warn een Sed 4 32 Reverse image 005 4 32 Scaling percent 4
198. ians or users familiar with Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 PostScript for troubleshooting The PostScript Language Reference Manual Adobe Systems Reading MA Addison Wesley 1990 ISBN 0 201 18127 4 contains more information on PostScript errors Choices for this option are yes and no The factory defaultis no Printer Configuration 4 41 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Memory This section briefly explains what each memory client does See appendix D Additional Technical Information for detailed information on the printer s memory and what benefits if any may result from adding memory to a particular client ADMINISTRATION MEMORY Select Previous P Next MEMORY E K MEM FOR SPOOL MEMORY MB PRINTER MEM MEMORY K MEM DISK CACHE MEMORY K MEM FRAMEBUFF MEMORY K MEM DISPLAY MEMORY K MEM FOR PSHEAP MEMORY K MEM PS FONTS MEMORY K MEM EMULATION MEMORY K MEM EMUL TMP Fig 4 10 Memory Submenu To find out how memory is currently allocated print a status page this option is in the Administration Special Pages menu or check each client individually in the Configuration menu The printer automatically reallocates added or freed memory to either the Display List or the Frame Buff
199. idge and helps assure quality printing Hold and squeeze the toner cartridge across the center and align it with the developer cartridge of the corresponding color fig 2 11 Make sure the toner cartridge s color coded pins line up with the notches on the developer cartridge Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter CAUTION Never force a toner cartridge onto the wrong developer cartridge This can damage the cartridges and the printer 6 Lower the toner cartridge until it fits firmly onto the notches on the developer cartridge 7 Press the top of the toner cartridge until it snaps into place under the two securing latches 8 Grasp the tab on the top of the toner cartridge 9 Holding the toner cartridge in place pull the tab and attached clear tape straight up and completely out of the cartridge fig 2 12 Then discard the tape 10 Set the print density dial fig 5 6 for the changed toner cartridge in the center if necessary 11 Replace the printer s top cover Replacing a Developer Cartridge A message on the control panel window X DEV LOW indicates when it is time to change a developer cartridge The x indicates which color should be changed Cyan yellow and magenta developer cartridges last for approximately 15 000 pages and black developer cartridges last for approximately 30 000 pages NOTE The industry standard for develope
200. idge from its protective bag until you are ready to install it Limit exposure to 800 lux the average fluorescent lighting in an office of light to under 2 minutes If exposure exceeds this put the belt in a dark place to recover depending on exposure recovery may take up to 2 hours Also handle the belt cartridge carefully by either the two green side handles or by the green end handle The belt is extremely Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter sensitive to hand oils and scratches both of which reduce print quality 4 5 10 11 12 Remove the new OPC belt cartridge from its protective bag Remove the pressure release and tension release pin sets one set on the left and one on the right from the OPC belt cartridge by pulling them straight out fig 2 25 NOTE These pins protect the belt and cleaning blade in the OPC belt cartridge by relieving tension during shipment or if the belt is out of the printer longer than a few hours Make sure the green end handle on the cartridge is turned up unlocked Slide the cartridge approximately three quarters of the way into the printer until the notches on each side of the bottom rest on the lip of the manual feed tray fig 2 26 Remove the black light shield paper from the OPC belt by grasping the tab on the front and pulling the paper straight out of the printer fig 2 27 Holding the
201. ility If the file that the IncludeFeature resource command is attached to does not make the downloaded font permanent and Retain Temporary is not set then those objects are removed from the disk when the job completes A downloaded font can only be accessed by its ID if the font is stored in the current Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D resource Regardless of its resource a font can be selected by its attributes resource id O to 6 identifies one of the possible locations for downloaded objects Default internal system disk If no resource item is provided the internal default location is used otherwise this parameter which must be provided specifies one of the alternate locations For most QMS printers resource 6 is the internal system disk object code 0 32767 assigns a code to an object such as a font macro or pattern IncludeFeature font font name Purpose Specifies the default font to use Fonts are identified by the names shown above Only the resident fonts may be selected the available set varies from printer to printer An asterisk in the name indicates that a font is scalable and that a point size needs to be applied using the pointsize command The value selectbyid indicates that the default font ID or unique font index set by the fontid command will be used for default font selection Selecting a bound bitmap font over
202. in Removing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to eliminate static electricity before you begin 2 Orient the controller board so that the side with the SIMMs is closest to you and the parallel port is located on your left side Printer Options 8 33 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 3 Ifyoudon thave an network interface board installed skip to step 4 If you do have an network interface board installed follow the instructions below for removing it a Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the two screws from the interface plate fig 8 21 b Detach the plastic ribbon cable from the interface card c Remove the network interface card from its plastic support posts and put it aside fig 8 21 Fig 8 21 Remove the Network Interface Board 6 34 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 4 Place the two shunts on jumpers JP1 and JP2 fig 8 22 Make sure both sets of pins are covered by the shunts Fig 8 22 Place the Shunts on the Jumpers Printer Options 8 35 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 5 Useaflat tipped screwdriver to remove the existing 1K ohm DIP resistor from the RP1 socket fig 8 23 Gently slide the screwdriver under the resistor and lift it up and off the controller board Fig 8 23 Remove the DIP Resistor 6 36 Printer Options EDNord Is
203. information about PostScript operators If you plan to send jobs in a mixture of emulations you should configure the parallel and serial ports for ESP mode This mode is a standard feature of Crown architecture It works with most popular commercially available applications using a form of artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data and select the appropriate printer emulation from those installed on the printer Connecting the Printer 3 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 If you configure an interface port for ESP mode then print jobs are processed without your having to change printer switch settings or send software commands to accommodate different printer emulations 3 24 Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Printer Configuration Chapter highlights E Printer configuration methods Control panel components and functions Moving through the menu and selecting options Description of the printer s configuration menu Document Option Commands supported EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Introduction This chapter briefly discusses the different methods of printer configuration and then explains how to use the control panel to configure the printer Printer Configuration Methods Controlling the Printer through an Ap
204. ing a PANTONE Color look up chart E Pantone Prism Demo for Macintosh This is a utility for printing outa PANTONE Color look up chart W Pantone Professional Color Toolkit for Macintosh This an application that is required for Pantone support for QuarkXpress for the Macintosh which also provides a PANTONE Color look up chart Instructions for installation and use of these files are included on the Pantone disk shipped with your printer The formulas in the PANTONE Color look up charts result in Pantone approved color only under the following conditions m A Pantone licensed application such as Adobe Illustrator QuarkXPress and Aldus FreeHand is used to create the color E The colors are printed with QMS supplied toner Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 E The colors are printed on Hammermill Laser Print white paper E The printer s Administration Emulations PostScript Default Halftones option is set to Enhanced if you have a magicolor LX with system software version 3 x or higher NOTE The formulas listed in the Pantone charts are only for the magicolor LX printer Also the PANTONE Colors generated by this printer are four color process simulations and may not exactly match Pantone identified solid color standards Use current PANTONE Color Refe
205. ing halftones increasing screen frequency results in finer detail but decreases the number of dots per halftone cell which decreases the number of colors that can be printed With fewer colors available color shifts are less smooth and banding can appear on prints To offset this effect we ve provided enhanced dithering settings to smooth color transitions and decrease the banding that can occur when using higher screen frequencies lines per inch In the Administration Emulations PostScript Default Dither menu you can choose from Standard Enhanced Low Enhanced Medium and Enhanced High dithering Standard the factory default setting is PostScript compatible dithering Enhanced dithering reduces the banding sometimes seen in PostScript compatible dithering with enhanced high producing the least banding Optimizing Color Output 7 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Gamma Correction NOTE When using the Enhanced Halftone setting Gamma Correction should be set to None As with most other printer settings gamma correction which is a means of optimizing gray scales and shades of color can probably be set through your application see your application documentation for more information However we provide a default gamma setting for each of the printer default halftone settings Gamma53 Gamma71 Gamma8 amp 0 and Gamma106 We also provide a None setting to turn off gamma correction Of
206. inter s top cover 17 Turn on the main power switch Replacing the Waste Toner Pack This section covers replacing the waste toner pack in your printer The pack collects excess toner from the printing process and should be replaced when the window on the control panel displays the message CHECK WASTE TONER Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section are in chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter To replace the waste toner pack 1 Open the waste toner cover by pushing the cover on the top right corner fig 2 22 2 Remove the new waste toner pack from its protective bag and assemble it according to the instructions accompanying it Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 3 Gently tap the old waste toner pack on its side to settle the toner down into the pack fig 6 4 Fig 6 4 Tap the Waste Toner Pack ENNA The toner is a highly combustible powder never burn it Also avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around your eyes it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefahr liches und leicht entz ndliches Pulver es darf deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Ber hrung kommen Einatmen oder Ber hrung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu
207. inter default fonts Choices are Courier 10 Font point 12 pitch Courier 10 Bold Courier 10 Italic Courier 12 point 10 pitch Courier 12 Bold Courier 12 Italic Times Times Bold Times Italic Times Bold Italic Universe Universe Bold Universe Italic Universe Bold Italic Universe Condensed Universe Condensed Bold Universe Condensed Italic Universe Condensed Bold Italic Lineprinter 8 5 point 16 66 pitch and Select by Index The Courier and Lineprinter fonts are bitmapped the others are scalable The default is Courier 12 point 10 pitch Symbol Sets the value for the character set used by PCL 5C Set jobs Choices include Roman 8 PC 850 PC8 US PC8 DN ECMA 94 Legal HP German HP Spanish ISO 2 ISO 4 ISO 6 ISO 10 ISO 11 ISO 14 ISO 15 ISO 16 ISO 17 ISO 21 ISO 25 ISO 57 ISO 60 ISO 61 ISO 69 ISO 84 ISO 85 Desktop PS Math Math 8 Microsoft Pub PI Font PS Text Ventura Intl Ventura Math Ventura US Windows PS Zapf Dingbats Ventura Dingbats Zapf Dingbats100 Zapf Dingbats200 Zapf Dingbats300 The default is Roman 8 Lines Sets the number of lines printed per inch The factory Per Inch default is 6 Printer Configuration 4 33 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Line Termination Point Size x100 Retain Temporary Scalable Fonts Default Font IDX Monochrome GL 2 Default Adds an indicator that controls the way the printer interprets CR c
208. inter is configured for the media size and type currently in the cassette See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations or chapter 4 Printer Configuration to learn how to use the Paper and the Media keys 3 Asa last resort try turning the printer off and on this will cause jobs to be lost Jam Recovery The printer has automatic jam recovery so if a media jam occurs once you remove the jammed media the printer reprints the jammed page and then continues with the print job as long as the printer power has not been turned off The Jam Recovery option is located in the Administration Engine section of the printer configuration menu NOTE Because jam recovery requires system memory it can slow print jobs Troubleshooting 9 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Preventing Media Jams Some printer problems are caused by improper handling of media or use of the wrong media and consumables The following section provides information about correctly handling media and preventing jams Several things you can do to reduce print media jamming in your printer are Set the printer for the print media type and size currently in the cassette See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations or chapter 4 Printer Configuration to learn how to use the Tray Select and Media keys Use QMS supplied toner and developer and use QMS recommended print media See appendix B
209. inting from a Windows or a Macintosh application you can select transparency printing from your application if you use the QMS supplied Windows or Macintosh driver See chapter 3 Connecting the Printer for information on installing the driver Then in the driver select Overhead from the QCOLOR setup options to print from the tray you set up for transparencies Youcan select any of the QCOLOR color setup options for transparency printing if you select the Transparency option in the Color Setup dialog box in the Windows driver or in the Macintosh driver select Transparency from the Media listbox without changing any other options If you do this the Customize option will appear in the QCOLOR setup listbox NOTE Any time you select a media type from the driver the tray you re printing to must already have been set from the front panel for the desired media type Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 4 Send your job Printing Labels For best results when printing labels format labels through your application and then run a test print on plain paper to check formatting and avoid wasting label sheets 1 See Refilling the Media Cassette or Manual Feed earlier in this chapter for information on loading media in the cassette Make sure you place the labels printing side up with the top edge feeding into the printer first 2 If you haven
210. ion Paper selection IncludeFeature input Output tray selection IncludeFeature output Resolution selection IncludeFeature resolution 4 58 Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations Chapter highlights E Refilling the media cassette Manual feed Printing transparencies Printing labels Printing on preprinted and prepunched media Printing envelopes Printing on thick paper stocks Page sizes imageable regions and margins Selecting and storing print media Collation Changing printer resolution Adjusting print density Cancelling and ending print jobs Using diagnostic and special pages EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Introduction This chapter covers print media handling printing and other daily printing operations Refilling the Media Cassette This section explains how to refill the paper cassette Tosee illustrations of the steps described in this section see chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup 1 Pull the paper cassette out of the printer 2 Make sure the cassette size key the slide on the back end of the cassette is set for the media size that you re loading fig 5 1 OO f
211. ion of appendix B Technical Specifications Media Storage Store media according to the manufacturer s instructions to optimize printer output and decrease the chance of jams during printing See appendix B Technical Specifications for additional media storage recommendations Print Media and Daily Operations 5 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Collating Collating means printing multiple copies of a job in numeric order The printer can deliver multiple copies of your files in collated order to the top cover Figure 5 4 illustrates collated and uncollated stacking for two copies of a four page file You can select collating through your application if its driver supports this option such as the QMS provided Macintosh or Windows driver or through the printer front panel see chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information Collated Uncollated Fig 5 4 Collated and Uncollated Output Configuring the Printer for Collation Since a hard disk is already installed using the hard disk for collation instead of system RAM greatly improves performance To specify which disk and how much of that disk should be used for storing collated print jobs use the Administration Disk Operations Collation menu
212. is NOT in the downloaded Ponte os Example B Job 1 oe oe oo IncludeFeature emulation pcl5 install 6 SEndComments ESC gt s W lt download font header gt c33E N O oe D 18 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D s W lt char 33 data gt c34E s W lt char 34 data c5F Example B Job 2 lt ESC gt 8U slpl2v0s0b4153This text will be in the downloaded font if it supports the ROMAN 8 symbol set is proportionally Spaced 12 points in height or scalable upright medium weight and has type 4153 Example C Job 1 oe oe oe IncludeFeature emulation pcl5 install 6 EndComments lt ESC gt s W lt download font header gt c33E s W lt char 33 data gt c34E s W lt char 34 data c5F N O oe oe Example C Job 2 IncludeFeature emulation pcl5 install 6 EndComments ESC gt 20Xthis text is also in the downloaded font oo oe oe oo oe Jo IncludeFeature remove resource id object id object type Purpose Removes an external object from the printer system Additional Technical Information D 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D object type object id oe oe Oo font font macro pattern or other object type specifies the kind of objects that are to be deleted from the specified printer s
213. is that exact color matches between the two devices are maintained wherever possible but the printed image may have a smaller range of colors than the original image since several image colors may be mapped to a single printer color We recommend that you use this CRD for printing spot colors The Business CRD The Business CRD matches the images on a monitor as closely as possible WYSIWYG Use the Business CRD for computer generated graphics The Photographic CRD QMS developed the Photographic CRD to optimize the quality of photographic images and other images with many subtle color shifts Like the Colorimetric CRD the Photographic CRD substitutes out of gamut colors with in gamut colors but it also adjusts compresses all other colors whether in gamut or out of gamut as necessary to maintain the proportional relationship between the colors Optimizing Color Output 7 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Color Management 7 12 A major concern in the color publishing industry today is keeping color consistent across devices with different color models For example when you scan a color photograph the scanner sends the image data to the computer in an RGB Red Blue Green format The computer then converts the data into another RGB format to display it on the monitor When the image data is sent to the printer itis converted into CYMK Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK format by the printer
214. istration Special Pages Sample Page This option controls the printing of a sample page This page gives the current screen frequency and halftone angles settings for the printer A bar that illustrates printing with these settings prints across the bottom of the page Administration Special Pages Header Page This option controls the printing of a header banner page before each job This page contains the following printer name selected interface job identification title submitting computer job owner routing message start time date application used creation time date copyright date version number job submission time job Start time and printer product name logo For details on this page and what it monitors see Header and Trailer Pages in chapter 5 This option is either on or off the factory default is off NOTE The information on header pages for this printer can be customized QMS Crown Document Option Commands an optional manual available from your QMS vendor contains more information on customizing separator pages Administration Special Pages Header Inputbin You can select the inputbin tray or cassette from which the printer pulls media when printing the header page Choices are upper and lower Upper is the factory default NOTE If you used the Administration Engine Inputbin x Name option to change the names of the input bins these names replace upper and lower in the message window Printer Configura
215. it and then the back cover 6 Close the paper exit unit When the control panel message window displays IDLE the printer is ready to print Troubleshooting 9 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Clearing Outer Jams When the control panel message window displays OUTER JAM media has jammed leaving the paper exit unit To clear this jam use the following procedure 1 Openthebackcoverby pressing the top right corner to release the spring latch fig 9 9 2 Open the transfer unit by grasping the green handle in the center and pulling it toward you and down fig 9 9 Latch Handle Fig 9 9 Open the Transfer Unit eis The fuser unitis hot Do not remove a jam in this area until the fuser unit cools Nee eis DieFixiereinheit wird sehr hei Bitte achten Sie darauf daf sie diese einige Zeit abk hlen lassen bevor Sie einen Papierstau beseitigen Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 3 Open the paper exit unit fig 2 13 4 Open the pressure release lever on the fuser unit fig 9 10 Pressure Release Lever Fig 9 10 Open the Pressure Release Lever CAUTION If you can see the outer jam in the transfer unit always remove it by pulling the media out through the transfer unit not up and out the paper exit unit This prevents the unfused toner from coming off on the exit rollers and getting do
216. ith a 25 pin male and a 9 or 25 pin female connector depending on the computer s serial port If you re replacing a printer you probably already have the necessary cables How to Choose a Cable We recommend using a parallel cable if possible because parallel communication doesn t require printer configuration while serial communication often does However if the printer is more than 6 feet 1 8 meters from the computer we recommend using a serial cable for better communication NOTE Interface cables should be no longer than 6 feet 1 8 meters for parallel or 25 feet 7 6 meters for serial communication 3 10 Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Making the Connection CAUTION If you re connecting the printer to a single computer turn off both systems first 1 At back of the printer attach one end of the cable to the appropriate port Parallel users Connect the 36 pin end of the cable to the printer port labeled parallel and close the clips Host Frinter 25 Pin Female Port 26 Fin Female Port Doo essen e fd Fig 3 2 Parallel Ports Serial users Connect the male end of the cable to the printer port labeled serial and tighten the screws Host Frinter 9 Fin Male Fort 25 Pin Female Fort Eee E Fig 3 3 Serial Ports NOTE The port covered with a metal bracket is the SCSI port which i
217. l Communications Commission Canadian Users This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Notices C 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix C Vfg 1046 1984 Conformity Statement Hierdurch bescheinigen wir daB dieses Produkt in bereinstimmung mit Postordnung 1046 1984 ist und RFI unterdr ckt ist Die Gesch ftslage und der Verkauf diese Ger te auszuprobieren mit der bereinstimmung und der Regierung zu best tigen wurde der Deutschen Bundespost gegeben Bescheinigung des Herstellers Importeurs Hiermit wird bescheinigt daf Laser Printer model magicolor LX in bereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der Vfg 1046 1984 funkentst rt ist Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Ger tes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur berpr fung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmungen einger umt QMS Inc Mobile AL Declaration of Manufacturer Importer We hereby certify that the laser printer model magicolor LX is in compliance with Vfg 1046 1984 and is RFI suppressed
218. l a RERO ERES D 8 MB Printer Mem llsslssles esses D 9 System Memory sss esee D 9 Hard Disk Management 04 D 9 Spooling Overflow ue e ee e e ea esses D 10 PS Protocole a a ERREUR ve Aldao D 10 PS Protocol Menu for Optional Network Interfaces D 12 Advantages iL oer t D 13 ix EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Glossary Index Implementation Luna e ee ee D 13 Updated DOCS ate TEMA RC nats D 14 PCL 5 Emulation Terminology D 14 EO sere eri eA D ection SS D 14 Font Index Number 2000005 D 15 Object ioi wh Shae hi Siete fee D 15 ReSourCe Su e e pee es BA rer ee D 16 Updated PCL 5 DOCs 0 0005 D 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter highlights B About the documentation B About your printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides a brief overview of the printer an explanation of the printer documentation and an explanation of the printer s main features and benefits Fig 1 1 The QMS magicolor LX The magicolor LX produces 300 or 600 dpi color or monochrome prints using advanced color laser technology combined with the QMS Crown multitasking printer operating system The magicolor LX prin
219. l the overflow space before passing the job to the processor PS Protocol Your printer supports a new protocol for communication between the printer and a host computer over a serial parallel or optional interface connection This new protocol is called PS protocol This binary communications protocol allows any 8 bit binary value 0 255 to be treated as data while allowing a few of the values to function as special control characters When communicating 8 bit binary data in binary or binary fixed mode the printer uses the quoting mechanism of the binary communications protocol BCP to distinguish between the special control characters and print job binary data D 10 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D To differentiate data from the special control characters any data that is the same as one of the following special control characters must be quoted ASCII ASCII ASCII Control Keyboard Name Hex Function NA SOH 0x01 Quote data character AC ETX 0x03 Abort job and flush to end of file AD EOT 0x04 End of file marker E ENQ 0x05 Reserved for future use Q DCI 0x11 XON in XON XOFF flow control S DC3 0x13 XOFF in XON XOFF flow control T DC4 0x14 Job status request AN FS Ox1C Reserved for future use A data byte is quoted by replacing it with a two character sequence The first character is a A ASCII hex 0x01 and the second character is the character i
220. lace the internal hard disk Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the procedure The internal hard disk upgrade kit includes the following E An internal hard disk E An antistatic wristband 1 Follow the instructions in Removing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to eliminate static electricity before you begin 2 Orient the controller board so that the side with the SIMMs is closest to you and the parallel port is located on your left side 3 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the hard disk but leave the cable attached to the controller board Printer Options 8 39 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 4 Remove the old disk by pulling up on each corner while steadying the board near the disk with one hand fig 8 25 CAUTION This disk fits tightly so you have to pull firmly but be careful not to flex the controller board while doing so Fig 8 25 Remove the Old Hard Disk amp 40 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 5 Hold the new disk vertically connector side down with the bracket facing the SIMMs and connect it to the ribbon cable fig 8 26 Inspect the connection from all four sides to make sure each pin is seated in the connector no pins are exposed Fig 8 26 Install the New Hard Disk 6 Align the new disk over its position on the board then attach it to the board by pressin
221. lays in the message window When you are prompted insert the font or emulation card into a slot on the front of the printer Press the Select key to enter the source The printer copies the contents of the card to the hard disk When the copying process is complete press the Menu key to exit the menu To remove the card use the following procedure a Ifyou are removing an LNO3 Plus or a ProCollection font card turn off the printer Otherwise make sure the printer is off line use the Online Offline key to turn off the LED b Pull the card out gently c Turn on the printer if it s off and put it back on line NOTE To use these fonts or emulations from an application make sure the printer driver installed supports them If not contact your application manufacturer for a driver that supports them Removing an Optional Card Font or Emulation To remove an installed option from a hard disk you need the original font or emulation card containing the files Use the following procedure Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 1 Make sure the printer is off line Press the Menu key to display CONFIGURATION ADMINISTRATION 2 Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu then press the Next key to display ADMINISTRATION DISK OPERATIONS 3 Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations submenu Then press the
222. le 6 1 covers storage specifications for toner developer and OPC belt cartridges Storage Specifications Toner Developer and OPC Belt Cartridges Characteristic Normal Conditions Severe Conditions Temperature 32 to 95 F 0 to 35 C Low 14 to 32 F 10 to 0 C High 95 to 104 F 35 to 40 C Humidity 10 80 RH 80 90 RH Period of 2 years after production date includes operation life Storage Storage Unopened in a cool dry well ventilated dark place Conditions Away from direct sunlight corrosive gases and solvents alcohol thinner diazole Away from liquids More than 90 of the entire storage period Less than 10 of the entire storage period 48 continuous hours at most during any one period Tab 6 1 Storage Specifications for Cartridges Handling Consumables The following list covers handling the consumables for your printer VENNA Toner and developer are highly combustible never burn them Also avoid inhaling loose powder or getting it around your eyes it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter Bei Entwickler und Toner handelt es sich um gef hrliche Pulver die leicht entziindlich sind sie diirfen deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Beriihrung kommen Einatmen oder Ber hrung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden da die
223. lefon 96333500 Appendix C FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense To comply with part 15 of FCC rules shielded interface cables must be used LISLE To prevent electrical shock do not remove any covers from your printer unless you are experienced in working with circuit boards and are following instructions for procedures described in QMS documentation AXo ELUI elE Um einen Elektroschock zu vermeiden sollte die Drucker abdeckung niemals von Unbefugten ge ffnet werden In jedem Fall m ssen die diesbez glichen Hinweise des Handbuches genau beachtet werden CAUTION Any modifications or changes to this product not expressly approved in writing by the manufacturer responsible for compliance to Federal Regulations could void the user s authority to operate this product within the Laws and Regulations of the Federa
224. lefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Pen 4 Yellow Pen 5 Blue Pen 6 Magenta Pen 7 Cyan Range On Sets the printer to monochrome 2 pen Off Sets the printer to color 8 pens When set to on the printer maps each pen to its as signed color then converts the color to a grayscale using the National Television System Committee NTSC color standard for luminosity coefficients Additive System Y 3R 59G 11B Example of how to use the Color Standard Formula White Y 1 0 3 1 0 59 1 0 11 100 gray Black Y 0 0 3 0 0 59 0 0 11 0 gray Red Y 1 0 3 0 0 59 0 0 11 30 gray Green Y 0 0 3 1 0 59 0 0 11 59 gray Yellow Y 1 0 3 1 0 59 0 0 11 89 gray Blue Y 0 0 3 0 0 59 1 0 11 11 gray Magenta Y 1 0 3 0 0 59 1 0 11 41 gray Cyan Y 0 0 3 1 0 59 1 0 11 70 gray Download Controls the default storage location of PCL objects Location fonts macros and patterns when not otherwise specified through QMS Document Option Commands DOCs Choices are Disk all downloaded PCL objects are stored in the default disk resource if present and Memory all downloaded PCL objects are stored in temporary storage in RAM Disk is the default setting DOCs specifying resources override this option on a per job basis If this option is set to Disk and no hard disk is installed memory is used as the default storage location If the printer ha
225. lefon 96333500 Chapter 9 E Isthe printer properly connected via LocalTalk type cable and transformer boxes See chapter 3 Connecting the Printer for information m Is LaserWriter and Laser Prep if you are using Laser Writer 6 0 x or later installed in your System Folder E Inthe Chooser have you selected the Laser Writer icon and highlighted the correct printer W Is AppleTalk active in the Chooser dialog box E Are the screen fonts installed E Is your application compatible with color PostScript Level 2 Check the application manual If your application supports color PostScript Level 1 but not Level 2 try setting the printer to Level 1 in the Administration Emulations PostScript Emulation Level menu Troubleshooting 9 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Mechanical Problems Control Panel Selections Don t Take Effect m Make sure you re saving menu selections before exiting the menu See Saving Configuration Selections in chapter 4 Printer Configuration E Some configuration selections do not take effect until the printer has been rebooted Look in chapter 4 Printer Configuration to see if the selection you are making requires a reboot Data LED Stays Lit After the printer warms up if the Data LED stays on two problems may exist 1 If you are downloading additional fonts too many can overload the printer s memory causing the print
226. ling ATA ATINADO 8 26 II ANA OS RITA AIRE bei 8 26 ODpHOnS dies whedon od RR 8 32 Usifig sid bre E oH ed 8 32 Network Notes O dades ARE AS 1 4 B 8 Networks 1 4 1 11 3 1 4 28 B 8 Interface bse cba tede dus 3 1 4 28 Optional interfaces 1 13 4 28 New Century Schoolbook 7 18 Next key aa ao estalo er dot EE Red 4 7 Noise level sie ce pee pIR ees B 2 Notes In manual 55 ebbe daa ade aoe 1 6 Novell NetWare 1 11 4 28 O Oil bottle Installing ae n Ree Shad 2 24 R plaemg 5 eoe AA ER 6 4 Whentoreplace uses sese 6 12 Oil Bottle Cleaning Pad B 7 One color printing 5 14 Online LED A ccs eevee Da an 4 4 Online Offline key ule 4 5 OPC belt Measurement 00 G 3 OPC belt cartridge Handling 6 3 6 11 Installation 000005 2 32 Light exposure 6 3 6 10 Planes rA 129 A Y e bs 6 10 Pressure release pin 2 34 6 11 Replacing oe Iba Ah sae ri 6 4 6 10 Temperature and humidity 6 3 Tension release pin 2 34 6 11 When moving printer 6 19 Operator Control menu 4 17 Chain Inputbin 4 19 Collation sirsa cce Rees 4 18 Collation submenu 5 12 Color Model 4 19 Color Separation 4 19 COPIES ese Sig ak ea Tu Pace s prend 4 18 Inputbinz 255 sce Sa
227. lor The imageable region for black on legal sized pages is 8 11 x 13 61 205 90 mm x 345 60 mm The imageable region for color on legal sized pages is an 8 11 x 11 7 205 90 mm x 297 18 mm region at the top of the page We recommend that you compose color legal sized pages so that color images stay in this 8 11 x 11 7 area near the top of the page and use the imageable region below this for black only Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Working Within Imageable Regions and Margins If you experience problems with your file being cut off not printing to the expected margins it might be due to an imageable region constraint There are two ways to compensate for imageable region constraints 1 Adjust margins page size or scale through your application 2 Use the PostScript translate and scale operators to reduce image size and change its placement on the page The OMS Crown Technical Reference an optional manual available from your QMS vendor contains information on using PostScript operators Selecting and Storing Media Media Selection Media versatility is one of the biggest benefits of the QMS magicolor LX printer It can print on plain or laser paper transparencies labels envelopes and thicker stocks between 24 and 43 Ib 90 g m and 163 g m Make sure that the media you select meets the specifications listed in the Media Handling sect
228. lso on our Windows Drivers disk to the Microsoft driver See the README file on our Windows Drivers disk for information on adding our WPD Note that the QMS driver for Windows can be loaded to be used for applications besides PageMaker 3 16 Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 If you use Adobe Photoshop for best output quality use the QMS supplied Windows driver Then so that choices in the QMS driver take effect go to PhotoShop s Page Setup dialog box and select Use Printer s Default Screen under the Screens option Testing Parallel Communication 1 2 Go to the DOS C prompt Create a short PostScript test file called PRINTEST PS by typing the following commands copy con printest psd showpage D Z To type D and Z press and hold down the Ctrl key while you type the letters d and z These are end of file characters You must type showpage which is a PostScript command telling the printer to eject a page in lowercase letters The J symbol means press the Enter key as it does throughout our documentation At the DOS C prompt send PRINTEST PS to the printer by typing the following command print printest ps If prompted for the name of the list device type the name of the parallel port the printer is connected to for example lptlJ NOTE If the computer has more than one parallel port they re probably labeled If not check the compute
229. m D 16 Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Updated PCL 5 DOCS 9o IncludeFeature scalablefonts value Purpose Enables disables PCL 5 scalable fonts to print PCL 4 documents that have selected PCL 5 scalable fonts or to more closely emulate the PCL 4 font environment value O enables scalable fonts or 1 disables scalable fonts Default 0 IncludeFeature install resource id object id Purpose Establishes the current resource and the default object ID value for the current job to which it is attached If it is attached to a job that downloads a font without setting the current object ID using the PCL escape sequence lt ESC gt X it has the appearance of storing the font on disk If no IncludeFeature install DOC command is sent the internal default location is used otherwise this parameter which must be provided specifies one of the alternate locations For most QMS printers resource 6 is the internal system disk resource id 0 to 6 identifies one of the possible locations for downloaded objects Default internal system disk object id 0 32767 assigns an ID to an object such as a font macro or pattern Default 0 The object ID can be used instead of the usual PCL command to assign an ID This ID is overwritten by any ID assigned from the PCL print job if present If neither a DOC command nor the PCL print job specify an ID th
230. matically changed to 300 Emul Timeout The number of seconds that emulations other than PostScript such as HP GL or an optional emulation wait for additional incoming data from 00000 no timeout to 99999 with a factory default of 00005 Job Timeout The number of seconds the printer spends processing a job before it ends the job from 00000 no timeout to 99999 with a factory default of 00000 no timeout ESP Timeout The number of seconds the printer when set for ESP mode spends trying to match emulations before printing the job using the default emulation Administration Emulations ESP Default menu from 00000 no timeout to 99999 with a factory default of 00003 Administration Communications Serial This option allows you to configure the printer host communications when using the serial interface Mode Mode allows or disallows the PostScript emulation interactive mode from the host The options are interactive noninteractive and disabled If mode is set to disabled the printer accepts no jobs through this protocol Interactive mode allows two way communication between the host and the printer Non interactive is unidirectional communication from the host computer to the printer only The factory default is interactive The printer must be rebooted for a change in this setting to take effect Emulation This option selects the emulation for the printer serial port The emulations available are ESP PostScript HP PCL 5C
231. mission of QMS Inc Copyright Notice This manual is Copyrighted 1995 by QMS Inc One Magnum Pass Mobile AL 36618 All Rights Reserved This manual may not be copied in whole or in part nor transferred to any other media or language without the express written permission of QMS Inc Manual Notice QMS Inc reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to the equipment described herein without notice Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions However QMS Inc makes no warranty of any kind including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this manual QMS Inc assumes no responsibility for or liability for errors contained in this manual or for incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this manual or the use of this manual in operating the equipment or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated Notices C 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix C Colophon This manual was written with WordPerfect illustrated with Adobe Illustrator and Micrografx Designer and formatted with Ventura Publisher The manual was printed in camera ready form on a QMS printer C 4 Notices EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Additional Technical Information EDNord Is
232. mm 5mm 5mm 5mm 0 16 0 16 4mm 4mm All measurements are accurate within 0 02 0 5 mm See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for more information on media Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Print Media Types Weights and Recommended Brands Media Type Weight Brand Plain Paper 60 to 90 g m Xerox 4024 16 to 24 Ib Laser Paper 60 to 90 g m Hammermill Laser 16 to 24 Ib Print White Thick Stock up to 163 g m N A manual feed only up to 43 Ib Transparencies 138 to 146 g m 3M PP2500 Xerox 3R 36 7 to 38 8 Ib 2780 Xerox 3R 3117 Labels 156 to 170 g m Avery 5260 41 5 to 45 2 Ib Envelopes 90 g m CraftMaster Velpa 24 Ib Sphinx White Wove Sub 24 Auto Fil 1914 NOTE Hammermill Paper offers free samples of its laser paper in varying weights In the US call toll free 800 242 2148 Media Storage 63 5 to 80 6 Fahrenheit 17 5 to 27 Celsius 60 to 70 relative humidity Media should be stored in its original wrapper on a flat surface away from dust and sunlight Paper Cas 250 sheets of paper sette Capacity 50 transparencies Output Tray 150 sheets Capacity B 6 Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Consumables Your QMS vendor can provide the consumables listed below for your color printer In the US you can also call 800 7
233. mmunication 3 8 Location for printer 2 3 Maximum slant ao 2 2 Requirements 2 2 2 Weight capacity 00 2 2 Location disk d6calnedokete RES 4 54 Lockup printer n nsaan nnna 9 26 Low power mode See Energy Saver mode M Macintosh sse aa eek eR da 3 1 Cable pinouts for serial port B 11 Change Printer Name message 3 4 Communication with printer 3 3 Index Laser Prep RR RERO 3 5 LaserWriter a da dad Desa 3 5 PrintMonitor 000 3 5 PS Executive Series Utilities 3 4 Screen fonts 00 1 11 3 4 System 6 5 ov venere gebe oet 3 6 System such Sh odd ot ee eges 3 5 Terminating resistors 3 2 Testing communication 3 8 Transformers ssl sese less 3 2 Troubleshooting 9 22 Macintosh checklist suus 9 22 Main power switch 2 44 B 2 Maintenance 004 6 25 Pr ventative cess oce etes 6 1 Manual Typographical conventions 1 6 Manual feed 22 00000 ee 5 3 Timeouts seose opne ed sa hicks 4 49 Manual Feed LED 4 5 Manual Feed Size menu 4 19 Manual feed belts cleaning 6 38 Manuals Overview user s guide 1 2 Manufacturer Importer C 2 Mat gIns o nes po os bg en eee be B 5 Image placement 5 10 G 2
234. n print jobs 4 Choose OK Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Because QCOLOR automatically adjusts the Halftone Gamma Correction CRD and for the Overhead setting Media Type these individual settings in the Options dialog box do nothave to be adjusted so they are grayed out when a QCOLOR option is chosen To be able to access individual settings such as Gamma Correction and CRD then QCOLOR must be turned off choose Printer s Default from the QCOLOR list box to turn off QCOLOR If you want information about the individual settings see the Fine Tuning Color Output section later in this chapter To get more information about the standard LaserWriter options choose the Help button in the driver window Optimizing Color Output 7 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Fine Tuning Color Output We ve configured your printer so that most users don t have to change the default settings to get excellent color output and we ve provided QCOLOR technology through the QMS supplied Macintosh or Windows driver to make it easy to automatically optimize color output See QCOLOR Automatic Color Control earlier in this chapter for more information However the printer is designed to allow you to change individual print quality features if you wish to or if your application requires you to use anon QMS Macintosh or Windows d
235. n RAM requirements and color resolution If you want to print 600 dpi monochrome documents on a printer Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 with 12 MB RAM make sure you select Monochrome in the Operator Control Color Model menu Also if you change the resolution you should choose the appropriate halftone setting and gamma correction setting for best results Administration Engine Page Recovery Use this option to enable or disable page recovery The default is enabled Enabling page recovery causes the printer to automatically reprint jammed pages as long as the printer is not turned off while the jammed is being cleared You may want to disable jam recovery to free up printer memory and enhance performance Administration Engine Manfeed Timeout This refers to the number of seconds the printer waits for media to be inserted in the manual feed slot before abandoning the job This variable has a minimum value of 00000 no timeout a maximum of 00300 and a factory default of 00060 Administration Engine Energy Saver The Energy Saver option specifies whether the printer changes to a lower power state the engine remains on but the fuser turns off after the printer is inactive for a user defined length of time The options are Off 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 2 hours or 3 hours of idle time before activation of low power state The factory default setting is 60 minutes
236. n accept simultaneously is increased So increasing this client can be beneficial in reducing network traffic but throughput speed is not necessarily increased If available a hard drive can supplement this client with additional memory needed for spooling See Hard Disk Management laterin this appendix PostScript Font Cache Listed as K Mem PS Fonts in the Administration Memory menu and also as Font Cache this memory client stores bitmapped representations of previously rasterized PostScript fonts which reduces the number of times a font must be converted from outline form to bitmap form so that pages print faster As the font cache memory fills the printer erases bitmapped characters to make room for new characters By increasing the memory allocated to this client the printer can store more characters and spend less time erasing and replacing characters in the cache Normally you do not need to change this memory client unless you use a large number of fonts at different point sizes There is no specific formula to use in figuring the amount of memory required by the font cache but after a certain point large font caches cause printing to take longer than smaller font caches because of the search time through the cache The recommended font cache size is 128 256 KB but you should experiment to see what font cache size works best for you Emulation Listed as K Mem Emulation in the Administration Memory menu this memor
237. n be printed in 600 dpi if you configure the printer for monochrome printing either through your application if its driver like the QMS provided Windows and Macintosh drivers supports this option or through the printer control panel You can print color and monochrome documents in 600 dpi if you install additional RAM in the printer See appendix B Technical Specifications for a chart showing RAM requirements for different page sizes and numbers of colors Troubleshooting 9 29 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 White or Light Lines B Remove each toner cartridge shake it as you do before installing a new cartridge to redistribute toner and then reinstall the cartridge E Install a new cartridge if necessary Light Image Entire Page E Increase the print density for any color s used on the page see Adjusting Print Density in chapter 5 for details B Remove each toner cartridge for a color used on that page and shake it as you do before installing a new cartridge Then reinstall the cartridge W Install a new toner cartridge if necessary See Replacing a Toner Cartridge in chapter 6 for details Light Image on the Left or Right Side of the Page all colors E Make sure the printer is level maximum 1 slant Dark Image Entire Page E Decrease the print density for any color s used on the page see Adjusting Print Density in chapter 5 for details E I
238. n later in this chapter Optimizing Color Output 7 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Enabling QcoroR for the Macintosh To use QCOLOR for Macintosh applications follow the instructions in Installing LaserWriter 8 x and the magicolor LX 4 1 PPD in chapter 3 Connecting the Printer After the QMS PPD is installed do the following to optimize color printing 1 In your application s Print dialog box choose Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box in the QCOLOR Setup listbox select one of the following options Printer s Default to use the settings chosen at the printer front panel Graphics if you re printing color graphics Photographic if you re printing photographic images Text and Spot Color if you re printing text or spot colors Third Party Color Management System CMS to allow your application to control color settings Overhead if you re printing overhead transparencies You can select any of the QCOLOR color setup options for transparency printing if you select Transparency from the Media listbox without changing any other options NOTE The media tray you re using must be configured for the media type it contains This can be done through the printer front panel in the Operator Control Media menu See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for more information on media 3 Choose the Save button to save the QCOLOR settings betwee
239. n reinstalling the system software and fonts Installing Print System Software and Fonts NOTE The system software and fonts provided with the magicolor LX printer will not function in other versions of the magicolor printer such as the magicolor or the magicolor Plus If magicolor LX software or fonts are downloaded to a non magicolor LX printer an error message will appear on the start up page Printer Options 6 51 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Print system software and font backup disks are supplied with the printer in case you ever need to reinstall them For example if the printer s internal hard disk is reformatted the system software and fonts will need to be reinstalled The procedure for downloading system software depends on whether the printer software is functional the printer starts up normally and IDLE appears in the message window or non functional the system software cannot start up and whether you are sending from a PC ora Macintosh Printer fonts would only ever need to be reinstalled if the printer software is not functional NOTE When you reload the system software the printer configuration is returned to its factory default settings so you may want to print out an advanced status page from the Administration Special Pages submenu so you have a record of current configuration menu settings See chapter 4 Printer Configuration of your User s
240. ndow QMS SOFTLOAD x x READY TO BOOT 2 Once this message appears you have 10 seconds to press the Select key When you press the Select key the following message appears in the message window QMS SOFTLOAD x x BOOT SYSTEM NOTE If 10 seconds passes before you press the Select key the IDLE message appears You must return to step 1 3 Press the Next key until FORMAT DISK appears on the second line of the message window OMS SOFTLOAD x x FORMAT DISK 4 Press the Select key to enter the Format Disk submenu Then press the Next key until the following message appears in the message window FORMAT DISK DISK 6 6 50 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 5 Disk 6 is the printer s internal hard disk Press the Select key The following message displays FORMAT ARE YOU SURE NOTE If you decide not to format the internal hard disk press the Menu key to back out of the submenus When you reach the top level you can use the Next or Previous key to select the menu you want 6 Press the Select key to begin formatting The message window displays FORMAT DISK FORMATTING Then when formatting is finished the message window displays FORMAT DISK COMPLETED 7 Press the Menu key until the following message appears OMS SOFTLOAD x x INSTALL TO DISK 8 Go to the next section for information o
241. ner unit which opens and toner is electrically attracted to the discharged areas In color printing each color is individually applied during a separate pass of the belt yellow first followed by magenta cyan and black The belt carries the toner image to the transfer drum where a slightly stronger charge attracts and stores the toner until all colors are processed Once the full image is collected the drum turns toward the transfer roller which has an even stronger attracting charge However just before the toner can switch to the transfer roller media passes between the drum and roller so the toner lands on the media instead Rollers pull the media up through the fuser unit where heat and pressure set the toner and the final copy comes out into the top cover Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Memory The memory requirements of the printer are dictated by the applications that you run Of the printer s memory 9 MB are divided among blocks or memory clients each dedicated to a specific purpose Added or extra printer memory if any can be redistributed among the memory clients where it can best serve your specific printing needs This appendix explains the different memory clients and what happens if you increase or decrease their memory allocations See the glossary for definitions of unfamiliar memory terms Don t feel compelled to recon
242. ng and traffic congestion on networks Normally this memory client does not need to be changed unless you plan to download many different non PostScript fonts Additional Technical Information D 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Display List Listed as K Mem Display in the Administration Memory menu this client shares its memory with the PostScript heap The display list stores compressed representations or blocks of the pages to be printed Approximately 1 compressed block is required for a normal 8 5 x 11 text page 4 compressed blocks for an 8 5 x 11 page that includes some graphics and as many as 500 compressed blocks for an extremely complex page Approximately 64 KB of memory for each compressed block is required by the printer Many pages of compressed blocks belonging to multiple print jobs can be stored simultaneously in the display list If enough memory is allocated to this memory client a page can always be ready to print as soon as another page has been imaged by the print engine so increasing the amount of memory in this client might improve printing throughput If not enough memory is allocated to this client memory is taken from the excess memory client PostScript heap to complete the print job Disk Cache Listedas K MemDisk Cache in the Administration Memory menu this memory client stores frequently used data in system memory instead of continually storing and retrie
243. ng it 6 8 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter around your eyes it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation Bei dem Entwickler handelt es sich um ein ge f hrliches und leicht entziindliches Pulver es darf deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Ber hrung kommen Einatmen oder Ber hrung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu ver meiden da dies zu Beeintrachtigungen der Atemwege Haut oder Augenreizungen f hren k nnte 7 Remove the new developer cartridge from its protective bag 8 Grasp the green latches at each end of the new developer cartridge and raise them straight up to open them 9 Holding the new developer cartridge by the green latches gently lower it into the empty slot until it is securely in place fig 2 7 10 Close the cartridge latches by pushing them down fig 2 8 11 Grasp the green tab attached to the top of the developer cartridge Then pull the tab and attached clear tape straight up and out of the cartridge and discard it fig 2 9 12 Replace the toner cartridge that you removed in step 2 13 Replace the printer s top cover 14 Clear the x DEV LOW message through the control panel using the Administration Engine Clear Warning menu See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for details on using the control panel Replacing the OPC Belt Cartridge This section covers replacing the OPC Orga
244. nic Photoconductor belt cartridge in your printer See How Your Printer Works in appendix D for details on what part the OPC belt plays in printing Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 6 10 A message on the control panel window REPLACE BELT indicates when it is time to change the OPC belt cartridge This cartridge should be replaced every 50 000 planes or 12 months whichever comes first A plane is a pass of the OPC belt for one color so a one color page makes one pass a two color page makes two passes and so forth Changing the belt on a regular basis helps prevent the print quality from deteriorating NOTE You may want to clean the paper guide and the register and paper exit rollers at this time also They should be cleaned every 20 000 copies or 12 months whichever comes first The procedures for cleaning these parts are given later in this chapter Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section on replacing the OPC belt cartridge are in chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup To replace the OPC cartridge use the following procedure 1 Open the manual feed tray 2 Lift the handle of the old OPC belt cartridge up to unlock it 3 Pull the cartridge straight out of the printer and discard it CAUTION The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights and direct sunlight Do not remove the new cartr
245. ns for installation and use are included on the Pantone disk provided with the printer Color Matching with PostScript Level 2 Your printer s PostScript Level 2 capabilities allow it to accept device independent CIE color specification directly in addition to CMYK or RGB color specifications This means that if you have an application that supports PostScript Level 2 printing such as Adobe PhotoShop or if you use the QMS developed driver for Windows or Macintosh your printer will perform color matching automatically QMS drivers for Windows and Macintosh were shipped on disks with your printer see chapter 3 Connecting the Printer of this manual for installation information These drivers work with the printer resident color rendering dictionaries to match colors See Printer Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries earlier in this chapter for more information on CRDs Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 The advantages of Level 2 color matching are that it is portable it is application and printer resident there s nothing else to buy and it is performed at the printer level so it doesn t tie up your host However no on screen preview of output is provided and you are not warned if a color is out of printer s gamut color range PANTONE Color Matching Your printer has been approved by Pantone Inc to simulate PANTONE Colors Pantone specifies hundreds of s
246. nstall a new cartridge if necessary See Replacing a Toner Cartridge in chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for details The old cartridge may be defective releasing too much toner 9 30 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Blurry Images Scratches or Missing Dots Make sure the media is in good shape and meets all the specifications in the Media Handling section of Appendix B Technical Specifications Check for a status message on the control panel The toner or developer may be low Replace cartridges as necessary Make sure the paper path is clean See the Preventative Maintenance section in chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance for details on cleaning the charger unit various rollers and plates Check the OPC belt for dirt and scratches Replace the OPC belt cartridge if necessary See the Replacing the OPC Belt Cartridge section in chapter 6 If whole blocks or portions of the page are missing there may be a mechanical problem contact your QMS vendor Image is Not Centered on the Page Make sure you aren t printing outside the printer s imageable region for the media size you re using see Media Handling in appendix B Technical Specifications You may need to change to a larger size media or adjust the margin s through your application If images are not printing within t
247. nsumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 33 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 6 34 Cleaning Register and Transfer Rollers Clean the metal and rubber register rollers and the transfer roller every 20 000 copies or 12 months whichever comes first This is roughly the same time schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the paper exit rollers so you may want to do all of these procedures at the same time All you need for this procedure are 2 or 3 pieces of lint free cotton cloth To clean the rollers 1 Open the back cover by pressing the top right corner fig 6 16 Fig 6 16 Open the Back Cover Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Open the transfer unit by pulling the green latch handle in the center toward you and down fig 6 17 Fig 6 17 Open the Transfer Unit Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 35 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 3 Using dry cotton cloths wipe the metal register roller in the transfer unit and the rubber register roller in the inner section of the printer Then wipe the transfer roller in the top section of the transfer unit fig 6 18 Rotate this roller to clean all sides with the cloth to remove paper dust toner buildup and other debris Metal Register Roller Rubber Register Roller Fig
248. nter Setup To replace the cleaning pad and oil bottle 1 Turn off the main power switch on the back of the printer 2 Remove the top cover fig 2 5 3 Pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back to open it fig 2 13 4 Pull back the two latches one on each side of the separator pawl unit to unlock it then tilt the pawl unit back towards the paper exit unit fig 2 14 WARNING The fuser unit can become extremely hot and cause severe burns Make sure the unit is cool before handling it Nemec Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr hei werden so da Verbrennungsgefahr besteht Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit einige Zeit abkiihlen bevor Sie diese beriihren Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Locate the cleaning pad in the slot above the heat roller Then while carefully avoiding the surface of the fuser unit which may be hot grasp the pad by its center tab towards the rear of the unit pull it out of the printer and discard it fig 6 3 Fig 6 3 Remove the Cleaning Pad 6 Remove the new cleaning pad and the new oil bottle from their protective bags 7 Holding the new cleaning pad by its center tab towards the rear of the unit align the triangle mark on the pad with the one on the fusing unit fig 2 17 8 Being careful to avoid any hot surface in the fuser unit slide the new pad into the slot ab
249. off Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current present Turn off all power switches first Plastic rubber wood painted metal surfaces and telephones are not acceptable grounding points The printer isn t an acceptable grounding point either because it must be unplugged before you perform this task If you don t have an anti static wrist strap discharge your body s static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any printer boards or components and before removing the tray assembly cover Redischarge your body each time after walking around and before touching the printer again Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Cable Pinouts LocalTalk The table below gives the correct pinouts for the printer end of the 8 pin LocalTalk cable used to connect a computer and printer Pinout Pin No Name LocalTalk 3 TxD 4 GND 5 RxD 6 TxD 8 RxD Macintosh to Serial The table below gives the correct pinouts for a cable connecting the Macintosh printer or modem port to the printer serial port This type of cable would be required to reinstall printer system software from a Macintosh if printer software is not functioning Pinout Host Serial Signal Direction Macintosh Pin No Pin No to Serial 1 5 RTS From Mac D 4 CTS To Mac 3 3 TxD From Mac 4 8 7 GND 5 2 RxD To Mac 6 NC 7 NC Pins 4 and 8 must
250. ollowing procedure 1 Pull out the media cassette fig 9 1 and check the media cassette slot If media is there skip to step 4 If not continue to step 2 heut Fig 9 1 Remove the Paper Cassette 9 6 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 2 Locate the manual feed platform it s a black plastic tray at the top of the media cassette slot 3 Remove the manual feed platform by lifting it up and forward at the front until it drops out fig 9 2 Fig 9 2 Remove Top Tray of Cassette Slot Troubleshooting 9 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 4 Remove any jammed media you see fig 9 3 Fig 9 3 Remove the Jammed Media 5 Check to be sure no other pieces of media are lodged farther back in the slot Then if you removed the manual feed platform replace it Push it back into the printer until it is secure 6 Make sure the media in the cassette is in good condition lies flat and does not exceed the upper limit mark on the cassette 7 Slide the cassette back into the printer until it s secure 8 Open and close the top cover to clear the jam message in the control panel window E the When the control panel message window displays IDL printer is ready to print 9 8 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500
251. on for a description of the two types of status pages Administration Startup Options This menu fig 4 9 allows you to configure your printer to perform certain actions automatically when it is turned on Printer Configuration 4 39 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 ADMINISTRATION STARTUP OPTIONS T r Select Previous lt Next STARTUP OPTIONS DO START PAGE STARTUP OPTIONS STARTUP OPTIONS DO ERROR HANDLER DO SYS START Fig 4 9 Startup Options Submenu Administration Startup Options Do Start Page This option allows you to enable and disable the start up page Choices are yes and no The factory default is yes Administration Startup Options Do Sys Start If you have a hard disk and Do Sys Start is enabled whenever the printer is turned on the controller checks the hard disk for a SYS START file and executes this file Choices for Do Sys Start are yes and no The factory default is yes More information on creating a SYS START file is available in the QMS Crown Technical Reference an optional manual available from your QMS vendor and from Q FAX See appendix A QMS Customer Support for information on Q FAX Administration Startup Options Do Error Handler When this option is enabled if a PostScript error occurs during a PostScript print job a page is generated reporting the error This information is used by QMS technic
252. on 96333500 Chapter 3 E Printer description files if you use QuarkXPress 3 3 Aldus PageMaker or Adobe PhotoShop PS Executive Series Printer Utility Software PS Exec included on the DOS disks we shipped with your printer is a utility for controlling the printer from the computer For example through PS Exec you can turn off the start up page rename the printer download fonts manage hard disks print font samples or print a file containing four color simulations of Pantone identified colors and the percentage of the process colors used to create them Many of the procedures described in this manual involve using PS Exec The README file on the PS Executive disk explains how to install the program and the on line help explains how to use it Installing a Color PostScript Printer Driver If you re using Windows we recommend that you install the QMS developed Windows driver See Installing the Windows 3 1 Driver below If you re using a non Windows application read the printing section of the application documentation for information on choosing a color PostScript driver If the application does not provide a color PostScript driver contact the application manufacturer to see if one has become available since you bought the program Also color PostScript drivers for some applications are available through the QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System and through CompuServe see appendix A QMS Customer Support for
253. on the status and start up pages If after consultation with CTA you need to return the unit for repairs or warranty work please be sure to get an RMA Return Merchandise Authorization number since QMS cannot accept warranty work without this number CTA can connect you with Customer Service to get this number QMS National Service For information on service and maintenance of QMS and other manufacturers printers call 800 762 8894 For information about on site service and depot repair call 800 858 1597 For information on spare parts call 334 633 4300 ext 2530 QMS Customer Support A 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix A QMS World wide Offices United States QMS Inc Latin America One Magnum Pass Mobile AL 36618 USA 334 633 4300 E mail info qms com Product Information 800 523 2696 OEM Information 800 631 2692 Consumables 800 777 7782 US Fax 334 633 4866 Latin America Fax 334 639 3347 Canada QMS Canada Inc 9630 Rte Trans Canadienne Saint Laurent Qu bec H4S 1V9 Canada Telephones 514 333 5940 800 361 3392 Fax 514 333 5949 National Service Canada 800 206 9234 Offices in Ottawa Qu bec City Toronto and Vancouver Europe Diisseldorf 49 211 596 1333 Middle East London 44 1 784 442255 Africa Maarssen 31 3465 51 333 Paris 33 1 4 107 9393 Stockholm 46 8 725 5680 Asia Pacific Hong Kong 852 511 5300 Melbourn
254. ontrol Panel Selections Don t Take Effect Data LED Stays Lit 000 No Start up Page 00 00 0 Printer Resets a a on EA eek es Printer Locks Up nee uoc ge i 2 00 eee ee eee Blank Pages er be iawn aes Not All Pages Print 000 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Print Quality Problems ee e e e eo 9 28 Generally Poor Print Quality 9 28 Specific Print Quality Problems 9 28 Placing a Service Call 0 02 00 0 000 9 34 Appendix A QMS Customer Support QMS Customer Support 00004 A 1 QMS National Service 0 000200 e ee A 3 QMS World wide Offices 0005 A 4 Appendix B Technical Specifications Print Engine isset RR REI GRE EAS B 1 Controller 15 ee A epe bee RR IW eO B 2 Internal Hard Disk ui ee e ea B 3 Electrical Requirements a e ee e e ee B 3 Environmental Requirements sus eo B 4 Media Handling ee suas e eee eee ee B 5 Consumables ins cu dec cache eed ea eed es B 7 Options e hee Aes BEE ele Roos B 8 SIMMS e gan igen UA hale RO lea ets B 9 Warranty Considerations 2 008 B 9 How Consumables Affect Your Warranty B 9 How Electrostatic Discharge Affects Your Warranty 0005 B 10 Cable Pinouts 0 0 0 do eee eee eee B 11 LocalTalk 0 0 2 eee ee B 11 Macintosh to Serial ue e ee B 11
255. or 25 4 mm The factory default setting is 100 Values above 100 move the image to the right for horizontal alignment or down for vertical alignment values below 100 move the image left for horizontal alignment or up for vertical alignment See Entering Alphanumeric Values earlier in this chapter if you re not sure how to enter a number in the message window NOTE Engine constraints may limit the accuracy of pixel alignment Administration Engine Default Paper Default Paper specifies a media size for the printer to use if it does not recognize the size specified for a job The choices are letter and A4 The factory default is letter Change the default to A4 if you print on metric size media Administration Engine Inputbin 1 Name Use this option to assign a name to the standard paper cassette input bin For example you may want to name it Letterhead if you always keep letterhead paper in that cassette The factory default is upper Administration Engine Inputbin 2 Name Use this option to assign a name to the optional lower cassette input Printer Configuration 4 47 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 bin For example you may want to name it Plain if you always keep plain paper in that cassette The factory default is lower Administration Engine Outputbin Name Even though there is only one output bin the output tray you may want to use this option to assign
256. or HP GL output Choices are off standard resolution for fixed and variable spaced fonts 4 x 8 grid and on enhanced resolution for variable spaced fonts 26 x 36 grid The default is off Use the enhanced mode for 7550A plotter emulation Choices are off and on default scaling points hard clip plotting range and maximum plotting area are all expanded The default is off Choices are A A3 A4 B and Scale to Paper the factory default Select the media size for which the plot was originally created Pen width choices range from 1 mm to 6 mm in 0 1 mm increments you can also enter a value of 0 for a 1 pixel wide line Color choices are black violet brown 25 gray 5096 gray 75 gray red orange yellow green blue cyan and magenta Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 The default pen width is 07 0 7 mm for pen 1 and 03 0 3 mm for all other pens The default color settings are as follows pen 1 black pen 2 black pen 3 red pen 4 green pen 5 blue pen 6 violet pen 7 orange and pen 8 brown Administration Emulations HP PCL 5C See the QMS Crown Technical Reference and the HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference optional manuals available from your QMS vendor for more information on HP PCL Also the HP PCL 5C Technical Support Notes available free through our bulletin board Q FAX and CompuServe has information on HP PCL 5C Default Sets the pr
257. ore data to transmit the host may do one of the following E terminate and return to the compatibility mode Wi stay in the HostBusy Data Not Available phase E setHostBusy Low putting the interface into the idle phase If there is additional data the host may do one of the following E set HostBusy Low indicating that the host can accept additional data E stay in the HostBusy Data Not Available phase E terminate and return to the compatibility mode Check your host documentation to see if the host is 1284 compatible Technical Specifications B 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B Dataproducts Parallel The following table describes the Dataproducts parallel interface cable that can be used with your printer Pinout Signal Return Signal Direction Dataproducts Pin No Pin No Description Parallel 1 2 Data Bit 3 In 11 Parity Error grounded 12 5V limited by 1K ohm resistor Out 19 3 Data Bit 1 In 20 4 Data Bit 2 In 21 5 Online Out 22 6 Ready Out 23 7 Demand Out 28 44 Data Bit 8 In 30 14 Paper Instruction In 34 18 Data Bit 5 In 36 35 Data Bit 7 In 38 37 Strobe In 39 Logic Ground 41 40 Data Bit 4 In 43 42 Data Bit 6 In 45 46 Interface Verify B 16 Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix C Notices EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg te
258. orel DEC DECnet VMS LNO3 Digital Equipment Corporation FotoFlow Agfa EFIColor Electronics for Imaging ColorSense Kodak Dreams Innovative Data Design Ethernet Xerox Harvard Graphics Software Publishing Helvetica Times Optima Palatino New Century Schoolbook Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries HP HP PCL HP GL PaintJet ColorPro Hewlett Packard IBMe IBM PC AT Token Ring DisplayWrite IBM Intel Intel ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Zapf Chancery ITC Zapf Dingbats ITC Bookman ITC Garamond International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States and in some foreign countries 1994 ITC Park Avenue Kingsley ATF Type Letraset Aachen Freestyle Revue Esselte Pendaflex in the USA Letraset Canada Ltd in Canada and Esselte Letraset Ltd elsewhere 1994 Letraset Lotus 1 2 3 Lotus Manuscript Lotus Development Matchprint Color Key 3M Microsoft MS DOS Excel PowerPoint Windows Microsoft Micrografx Micrografx Designer Micrografx MultiMate MultiMate International an Ashton Tate company Novell NetWare Novell ICC International Color Consortium PhoneNET Farallon Computing SuperPaint Silicon Beach Software UNIX AT amp T Bell Laboratories WordPerfect WordPerfect WordStar MicroPro International Hammermill Laser Print International Paper QuarkXPress Quark Inc POCE Pantone Inc PANTO
259. ove the heat roller The pad is correctly positioned when it is centered snugly in the slot 9 Snap the separator pawl unit closed 10 Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle retainer and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the printer fig 2 19 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 6 14 NOTE Normally a little oil remains in the fuser slotin which the oil bottle rests and the spout of the oil bottle has a seal to prevent oil from spilling while you remove or install a bottle on the pin in the fuser slot However if oil accidentally spills beyond that slot use a clean dry lint free cloth or some cotton swabs to wipe up the excess 11 Grasp the top tab on the oil bottle then lift the bottle out of the printer and discard it NOTE If you are replacing an oil bottle after a move remove and discard the wadded paper towel from the place normally occupied by the oil bottle 12 Hold the new oil bottle spout end down bottle label toward the front of the printer over its slot in the fuser unit fig 2 19 13 Lower the bottle into place making sure the spout on the bottom aligns with the pin in the fuser slot The bottle is positioned correctly when it fits snugly into the slot and is flush with the fuser unit 14 Close and latch the oil bottle retainer 15 Close the paper exit unit 16 Replace the pr
260. parator Latches Fig 2 14 Open Separator Pawl Unit front view Initial Printer Setup 2 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 3 Open the pressure release lever on the end of the fuser unit fig 2 15 Pressure Release Fig 2 15 Open the Lever rear view 2 22 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 4 Grasp the tab end of one of the green pressure release pieces and gently pull it up and out of the printer fig 2 16 Remove the piece at the other end of the fuser roller in the same manner Pressure Release Piece Fuser Rollers Separator Latch Fig 2 16 Remove Both Pieces front view 5 Store the two pressure release pieces in a safe place NOTE You need to reinstall both pieces if you move the printer farther than just across a table or from one side of a room to another especially if the printer may not remain level or may be jostled See Moving your Printer in chapter 6 for details on replacing these pieces Also reinstall both pieces if the printer will not be used for 2 weeks or more 6 Close the pressure release lever on the end of the fuser unit Once the pressure release pieces are removed you need to install the cleaning pad and oil bottle Initial Printer Setup 2 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Installing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle The
261. pe Ee debts 1 12 Memory eb bene gebe oo vs 4 43 Memory temporary 4 44 Parallel interface 4 25 PostScript an ra AA ATADA 1 12 Serial interface 4 22 Specifying ssh ved kde nes 3 23 THMCOUt Sg 4s ee a etd dg e Mes 4 22 Emulations menu ESP Default Emul option 4 36 ESP option 4 22 4 25 Hexdump option 4 22 4 25 HP PCL SC option 4 22 4 25 4 33 HP GL option 4 22 4 25 4 31 Lineprinter option 4 30 LNO3 option 4 22 4 25 PostScript option 4 22 4 25 4 28 End job mode Parallel interface 4 26 Serial interface 4 23 Energy Saver mode 1 9 4 49 EDGING uere ci Pret nes 4 46 Duty cycle sic chee era eid cog ole gem AA B 2 Noise level o oe tk ass B 2 Power switches B 2 Print method B 1 Resolution 00 1 8 B 1 Speed ois se Bes endive bes eile B 2 Warm up time 0 B 2 Engine menu 00000 4 46 Clear Warning option 4 4 4 48 Default Paper option 4 47 Energy Saver option 1 9 4 49 Image Alignment option 4 47 Inputbin 1 Name option 4 47 Inputbin 2 Name option 4 47 Jam recovery option 4 49 Manfeed Timeout option 4 49 Outputbin Name option 4 48 I 5 EDNord I
262. pendix A QMS Customer Support Lists sources of help and information m Appendix B Technical Specifications Provides technical specifications for the printer and lists available supplies and replacement parts This appendix also gives the recommended pinouts for LocalTalk serial Introduction 1 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 IBM PC XT IBM PC AT and parallel Centronics and Dataproducts cables Appendix C Notices Presents legal safety and other notices Appendix D Additional Technical Information Provides information on how your printer works and on customizing the printer s memory allocation Glossary Explains many of the terms used in the documentation Optional Documentation The following optional manuals are available from your QMS vendor B QMS Crown Document Option Commands This document lists and explains Document Option Commands DOCs You insert these commands into documents or separator files to enable job specific printer features or special features that your application or page description language can t access In most cases only advanced network users and system administrators need this information QMS Crown Network Notes These notes provide tips for getting the best performance from your printer if it s connected to a network through the parallel or serial port In most cases only advanced network users and system administrators need this
263. plication s Printer Driver The easiest way to control the printer is through your application s printer driver See chapter 3 Connecting the Printer of this manual and your application documentation for information on choosing and installing a printer driver If you print from Windows or a Macintosh we recommend you use the QMS developed Windows or Macintosh driver shipped with your printer because it supports all your printer s special features Controlling the Printer with PS Executive Utilities The PS Executive Series printer utilities software shipped with the printer provides a way to control the printer from a host The PS Executive Series Utilities README file and the on line documentation explain how to install and use this software Controlling the Printer through Printer Commands The printer can also be controlled through printer commands PostScript operators HP GL commands HP PCL 5C commands or QMS Document Option Commands DOCs DOCs enable job specific printer features or features your application or page description language can t access See QMS Crown Document Option Commands and HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference Printer Configuration 4 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 and the OMS Crown Technical Reference optional manuals available from your QMS vendor for information on these commands Controlling the Printer with the Control Panel Another way
264. pot colors each identified by a unique number Each of these spot colors can be simulated on the printer with the appropriate combination of process CMYK colors Within a Pantone licensed application such as Aldus FreeHand or Adobe Illustrator you can choose a PANTONE Color number and the corresponding CMYK simulation is printed Pantone tables for supporting applications are shipped on a Pantone disk with the printer including the following W Aldus FreeHand Macintosh and Windows E Adobe Illustrator Macintosh and Windows B QuarkXpress Macintosh only B CorelDRAW Windows only Instructions for installation and use are included on the Pantone disk provided with the printer If you did not receive a Pantone disk with your printer call QMS Customer Technical Assurance Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials Optimizing Color Output 7 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 If a particular application does not support PANTONE identified colors but does allow process color specification the CMYK values may be entered directly to simulate PANTONE Colors For this purpose the following PANTONE Color look up charts containing four color simulations of Pantone identified colors and the percentage of each process color used to create them are included with your printer B PANTONE PS for PCs This a PostScript file contain
265. pters you really shouldn t miss and which you need to visit only if you have the time and interest or a special purpose It s pretty much the same information as in the table of contents but in a descriptive format Headers Footers and Tab Dividers Use these features as road signs to help you locate the section of the manual you want to visit Index While some people like to wander through a city stopping wherever they find something interesting others like to call ahead to make a reservation for a specific hotel or restaurant Our Blue Pages speed you to the information you want quickly and without unnecessary detours Easy on easy off We think you ll find the blue color especially useful when you have more than one manual in the binder We hope you enjoy your new QMS printer and traveling through its manuals too Your QMS Technical Writer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Table of Contents Introduction Introduction un ee cee eee eee eee 1 1 About This Manual pone e 0000 c eee eee eee 1 2 Optional Documentation 0 1 4 Other Documentation 0 000 1 5 Typographic Conventions 0 1 6 Printer Features 0 0000 e eee eee eee 1 7 Color Laser Technology sess 1 7 QCOLOR Technology lesseeeeesss 1 7 Multiple Resolutions
266. ptions for more information about using the Disk Operations menu The QMS Crown Technical Reference an optional manual available from your QMS vendor also contains information about hard disks ADMINISTRATION DISK OPERATIONS Select P Previous Next Z DISK OPERATIONS 3 INSTALL OPTION DISK OPERATIONS DISK OPERATIONS COLLATION REMOVE OPTION DISK OPERATIONS DISK OPERATIONS SPOOL OVERFLOW FORMAT DISK Fig 4 13 Disk Operations Submenu NOTE If an error occurs during disk operations an error message displays until the Menu key is pressed The operation must then be restarted from the beginning Two error messages you may see are READ FAILURE the drive has encountered a read error and WRITE ERROR either the hard disk had a write error or there is no room for data on the hard disk or in RAM Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 CAUTION If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer this QMS magicolor LX printer software automatically reorganizes the files on the hard disk when the printer is turned off and back on again After this reorganization the files on the hard disk can no longer be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to the earlier QMS Crown printer This reorganization takes time Don
267. r s name selected interface job identification title submitting computer job owner routing message start time date application used creation time date copyright date version number job submission time job start time job finish time number of sheets printed and printer product name logo The trailer page also lists any printer errors generated while processing or printing your document You can enable a trailer page through the Administration Special Pages Trailer Page menu See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for details Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance Chapter highlights E Storing and replacing consumables B Moving the printer E Performing preventative maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter Introduction This chapter covers storing and replacing major consumables and performing preventative maintenance on your printer Storing and Handling Consumables This section covers storing and handling the major consumables for your printer except for print media Print media is covered in chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 2 Storing Consumables Tab
268. r copies or 12 months have passed Rollers since the last cleaning whichever Clean the Paper Exit Rollers and comes first Plates Clean the Paper Feed Rollers and Manual Feed Belts When a message mentioning a Look up the message in chapter 9 consumable appears in the control Troubleshooting and take the panel action recommended UEN Remove the printer s power cord from the power outlet before cleaning or an injury may result Neun Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose bevor Sie den Drucker reinigen Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 25 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 General Tips for Extending Printer Life E Do not place anything on the top of the printer E Keep the output levels in the top cover at 150 sheets or less depending upon the type of media If media stacks too high you may experience trouble with paper jams and excessive curl Wi If you are not going to use the printer for an extended period of time unplug the power cord from the power source outlet and close the manual feed tray Cleaning the Printer When cleaning the printer follow these guidelines 6 26 E Read all caution and warning labels carefully making sure to follow any instructions contained in them Use a lint free cloth dampened with a mild general cleaner on the exterior of the printer do not use any organic solvent such as thinner
269. r documentation for the LPT port names Connecting the Printer 3 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Ifthe printer and computer are communicating a blank page should eject from the printer You are ready to start printing If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly check your AUTOEXEC BAT file to see if LPT1 the parallel port is being directed to COMI the serial port If the AUTOEXEC BAT file contains the following line delete it MODE LPT1 COM1 Then type mode lptl p in the AUTOEXEC BAT file so that print jobs are sent until the printer accepts them Reboot and try the communication test again See chapter 9 Troubleshooting and refer to your DOS documentation for more information Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Testing Serial Communication 1 2 Go to the DOS C prompt Create a short PostScript test file called PRINTEST PS by typing the following commands copy con printest psd showpagea D ZH To type D and Z press and hold down the Ctrl key while you type the letters d and z These are end of file characters You must type showpage which is a PostScript command telling the printer to eject a page in lowercase letters The J symbol means press the Enter key as it does throughout our documentation At the DOS C prompt send PRINTEST PS to the printer by typing the
270. r management system and should be done only as a last step to improve print quality The normal setting is the center position Each toner color has its own adjustment dial so you can adjust colors individually To change density settings use the following procedure 1 Remove the top cover by lifting it up and out Then set the cover aside for now Print Media and Daily Operations 5 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 2 Locate the adjustment dials inside the printer to the front left fig 5 6 Print Density Dials Fig 5 6 Print Density Adjustment Dials 3 Turnthe density adjustment dial to the left counterclockwise to lighten the print or to the right clockwise to darken the print 5 16 Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs The Cancel key allows you to cancel the oldest job s compiling or printing in the printer or to send an end of job indicator for a print job NOTE If you accidentally press the Cancel key press the Menu key to tell the printer to stop cancelling a job Cancelling a Print Job To cancel a job currently printing or compiling data use the following procedure 1 Press the Cancel key The following message displays in the message window CANCELLING JOB YES 2 Press the Select or Cancel key to confirm your choice T
271. r Configuration Describes control panel components and functions and tells how to use the Configuration menu to configure the printer to your printing requirements W Chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations Discusses print media sizes loading handling and storage It also covers operations such as printing 1 2 Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 envelopes transparencies thick stock and labels adjusting print density and canceling or ending print jobs W Chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance Guides you through handling and replacing consumables such as the toner developer cleaning pad oil bottle OPC belt cartridge and waste toner pack It also covers moving and preventative maintenance for the printer Reference E Chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output Discusses QCOLOR the QMS automatic color control technology explains how to fine tune color options discusses color matching and lists the printer s typefaces m Chapter 8 Printer Options Describes installing and using optional printer hardware such as font emulation and security cards memory upgrades SIMMs hard disks and network interface cards Also explains how to upgrade the system software W Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Explains how to clear jams and interpret status messages outlines possible print quality problems and solutions and explains how to place a service call m Ap
272. r measurement is quoted at 5 coverage for letter or A4 size media To replace a developer cartridge use the following procedure 1 Remove the printer s top cover fig 2 5 2 Remove the toner cartridge by holding it across the center squeezing the sides to loosen the pins on the back side from the developer cartridge notches fig 6 1 Then lift the toner cartridge straight up and out of the printer Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 Set the toner cartridge aside for now being careful to keep it level Also be sure to place it on something such as a large sheet of paper to catch loose residue Grasp the green latches at each end of the used developer cartridge and raise them straight up to open them Release the developer cartridge from its securing latches by pressing back on the latches while pulling forward on the cartridge fig 6 2 The securing latches are color coded black cyan magenta or yellow to the color of the developer cartridge Fig 6 2 Release the Developer Cartridge Holding the developer cartridge by the green end latches gently lift it straight up and out of the printer being careful not to spill any of the developer material Then discard the cartridge following safety laws and regulations WARNING The developer is a highly combustible powder never burn it Also avoid inhaling loose developer or getti
273. ratched or damaged Removing the Fuser Unit and Oil Bottle Before you move the printer you must remove the fuser unit and the oil bottle and drain the remaining oil from the oil tray To do this 1 Turn off the main power switch on the back of the printer 2 Remove the top cover fig 2 5 3 Pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back and down to open it WARNING The fuser unit can become extremely hot and cause severe burns Make sure the unit is cool before handling it Nemec Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr hei werden so da Verbrennungsgefahr besteht Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit einige Zeit abkiihlen bevor Sie diese beriihren 4 Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle retainer and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the printer fig 2 19 5 Grasp the top tab on the oil bottle then lift the bottle out of the printer The bottle may leak slightly so place it in an Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 oil proof container such as a plastic bag until you are ready to reinstall it after the move NOTE Normally a little oil remains in the tray in which the oil bottle rests If oil accidentally spills beyond this tray into the printer use a clean dry lint free cloth or some cotton swabs to wipe up the excess 6 Close the oil bottle retainer 7 Grasp the fuser unit
274. rence Manuals available from Pantone Inc for accurate color The advantages of using PANTONE Color matching are that it is easy to use itis widely supported and that itis good for spot color However it is not as accurate as other methods of color matching it can t be used for photographs and it is only supported by applications Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials Optimizing Color Output 7 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 The Resident PostScript Fonts This section lists the fonts resident in your printer All of these fonts are authentic they are licensed and carry the true name See your QMS vendor if you are interested in obtaining more fonts Serif Sans Serif ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demibold ITC Bookman Demibold Italic Courier Courier Oblique Courier Bold Courier Bold Oblique New Century Schoolbook New Century Schoolbook Italic New Century Schoolbook Bold New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic Palatino Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demibold ITC Avant Garde Demibold Oblique Helvetica Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Oblique Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg tel
275. reserved for as long as the printer power is on so repetitive downloading is unnecessary Compile ahead Processing Pages are compiled into intermediate compressed blocks of data that can be immediately and more easily rasterized or more efficiently stored for concurrent compiling rasterizing and printing This allows the printer to maintain full print speed under maximum job activity User configurable Input Buffers Printer memory can be configured to enable the most efficient spooling for a particular environment Chapter 4 Printer Configuration contains more information on printer memory Spooling Overflow Data is spooled transparently to the internal hard disk so input buffers aren t limited to RAM capacity Compressed Data Format Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 Data is compressed so that entire documents can be stored in the printer allowing users to take advantage of advanced document handling features such as jam recovery without resending files Media Flexibility With this printer you can print on plain paper laser paper transparencies labels envelopes and thick stock in letter A4 executive and legal sizes Plain paper economical and widely available is the ideal choice when adding spot color to reports newsletters and other documents Laser paper such as Hammermill s Laser Print allows the richest color output and most consistent co
276. rg telefon 96333500 Chapter test file for that color to see if it prints correctly This procedure can extend the life of your cartridges To replace a toner cartridge use the following procedure 1 Remove the top cover fig 2 5 VENNA The toner is a highly combustible powder never burn it Also avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around your eyes it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefahr liches und leicht entz ndliches Pulver es darf deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Ber hrung kommen Einatmen oder Ber hrung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden da dies zu Beeintrachtigungen der Atemwege Haut oder Augen reizungen f hren k nnte Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 Remove the old toner cartridge by holding it across the center squeezing the sides to loosen the pins on the back side from the developer cartridge notches Then lift the toner cartridge straight up and out of the printer fig 6 1 and dispose of it following safety laws and regulations Fig 6 1 Remove the Old Toner Cartridge Remove the new toner cartridge from its protective bag Toner cartridges are color coded on the top Be sure you have the correct color cartridge Hold the cartridge by the ends and shake it horizontally fig 2 10 This distributes toner evenly inside the cartr
277. rides the default settings for symbol set and point size An unbound font uses the specified default symbol set if possible while a scalable font uses the default font size font name courier12times blditalic courier 12bolduniv courier 2italicuniv italic courier 1Ouniv bold courier 1Obolduniv blditalic courier Oitalicunivcond lineprinter univcond italic times univcond bold times italicunivcond blditlc times bold selectbyindex 9o IncludeFeature fontid index Additional Technical Information D 21 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Purpose index Specifies the default font index number This index is used when the Default Font selected is selectbyid This allows for selection of fonts only on the current resource Selection of default font by index overrides the symbol set value The symbol set is overridden if a bound font is selected as the default or if an unbound font is selected that does not support the default symbol set If a font with the specified index exists itis selected as the Default Font If the specified value does not exist courier 12 point is substituted 0 to 32767 IncludeFeature symbolset name Purpose name Specifies the default symbol set for the emulation This command specifies the default symbol set Not all symbol sets are available with certain resident fonts In particular the Desktop PS Math Math 8 Microsoft Pub Pi Font P
278. rint envelopes from the manual feed tray see Manual Feed earlier in this chapter Envelopes are loaded with the printing side up so that the top of the envelope the flap side is on the left as the envelope is pulled into the printer Printing on Thick Paper Stocks To print on heavy paper stocks between 24 and 43 Ib 90 g m and 163 g m 1 Setup the manual feed tray for printing thick stock 5 8 Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 a Press the Online Offline key to take the printer off line The Online Offline LED goes out and IDLE appears in the message window b Press the Menu key to enter the Configuration menu Then press the Next key until the following message displays CONFIGURATION OPERATOR CONTROL c Press the Select key to choose the Operator Control menu Then press the Next key until the following message displays OPERATOR CONTROL MEDIA d Pressthe Selectkey to enter the Media menu then press the Next key until the following message displays MEDIA FOR MANUAL BIN e Press the Select key to enter the Manual Bin menu then press the Next key until Thick Stock appears in the message window FOR MANUAL BIN THICK STOCK f Press the Select key to choose Thick Stock g Press the Online Offline key to exit the Configuration menu or press the Menu key to back out of the Configuration menu one level at a time The
279. rinter reattaching the power cord and turning on the power switch 6 42 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output Chapter highlights B QCOLOR automatic color control E Fine tuning color output E Color matching m The resident fonts EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Introduction This chapter offers hints for automatic color control and fine tuning color output discusses color matching and lists the printer resident fonts QCOLOR Automatic Color Control As with any form of color reproduction many variables can contribute to the final appearance of color laser prints To take the guesswork out of optimizing color output QMS developed QCOLOR which dynamically configures the magicolor LX for the best output quality based on the contents of the document text line art photographs or scans and the media it will be printed on QCOLOR technology is accessed through our Windows or Macintosh driver Enabling QCOLOR for Windows To use QCOLOR for Windows first follow the instructions in Installing the Windows 3 1 Driver in chapter 3 Connecting the Printer if you haven t already After the QMS Windows driver is installed do the following to optimize color printing 1 Open the PostScript Printer driver dialog box You c
280. rinter comes configured with enough frame buffer memory for a single four color 300 dpi legal size page or a single four color 600 dpi letter size page in the largest media size supported PostScript Heap Listed as K Mem for PSHeap in the Administration Memory menu and elsewhere as PostScript VM and Virtual Memory this client holds downloaded fonts PostScript operators and forms Inefficiently coded PostScript jobs can consume an infinite amount of virtual memory or leave objects in the PostScript heap after the print jobs are completed leading to virtual memory errors If not enough memory is allocated to the PostScript heap the job cannot print Increasing the memory allocated to this client allows more complex jobs to print and increases the number of fonts that can be downloaded to virtual memory If you receive a virtual memory error when attempting to print a job or download a font this client should be increased in small increments until the error message goes away Spool Buffers Listed as K Mem for Spool in the Administration Memory menu and as Host Input on the status page this memory client stores incoming data from all the interfaces until the physical print engine can print the job When enough memory is allocated to this client Additional Technical Information D 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D the host becomes free more quickly and the number of jobs that the printer ca
281. rinters but must be followed carefully to avoid damage to the printer QMS reserves the right to charge for repairs necessitated by improper installation See appendix B QMS Customer Support for information on contacting QMS Initial Printer Setup 2 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Finding a Good Location for Your Printer Location Requirements Your printer should located On a hard level surface maximum I slant capable of supporting the printer weight approximately 106 Ibs 48 kg Away from cooling sources heating sources extreme temperature changes direct sunlight excessive dust and corrosive chemicals or vapors Away from any strong electromagnetic field such as that created by an air conditioner and excessive vibration In an area with a moderate temperature 64 to 81 F 18 to 27 C In an area with a relative humidity of 60 to 70 An appropriate distance from the host less than 6 feet 1 8 meters for parallel communication less than 25 feet 7 5 meters for serial communication Near an electrical outlet Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 W With proper clearance and ventilation area left side 36 90 cm right side 4 10 cm front 28 70 cm rear 16 40 cm m With enough space for you to open the printer and to access the paper cassette s Figure 2 1 illustrates the proper
282. river This section gives more detailed information about the individual color settings available E Printer default halftone E Dither pattern not available in the Macintosh driver E Gamma correction E Color rendering dictionary CRD These settings can be changed in the printer configuration menu or in the QMS supplied Macintosh or Windows driver See chapter 3 Connecting the Printer for information on installing these drivers Printer Default Halftone Settings Halftone settings such as screen line frequency and screen angles play an important part in the appearance of a color print For example incorrect halftone angles can cause prints to have a mottled appearance called moir Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 Screen frequency also known as screen lines is the number of halftone cells per inch The higher the frequency the higher the quality of the color print Screen angles are the angles at which halftone screens are placed in relation to one another to avoid undesirable moir patterns Although your application probably gives you the ability to fine tune halftone settings we have provided several printer default settings that we have found to optimize print quality for different printing tasks at different resolutions Enhanced Halftone This halftone setting which is the factory default setting gives the best results for most jobs providin
283. rrent serial port settings To change them to match the PC serial settings use the printer control panel as described below 1 Press the printer control panel Online Offline key to make the Online LED go out 2 Press the Menu key to enter the top level menu then press the Next key until the message window displays OPERATOR CONTROL ADMINISTRATION 3 Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu then press the Next key until the message window displays ADMINISTRATION COMMUNICATIONS 4 Press the Select key to enter the Communications menu then press the Next key until the message window displays Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL 5 Press the Select key to enter the Serial menu then press the Next key until the message window displays SERIAL BAUD RATE 6 Press the Select key to enter the Baud Rate menu The message window displays the currently selected baud rate represents a default setting 9600 BAUD 7 Press the Next key until the correct baud rate is displayed NOTE Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require that either RTS or CTS hardware flow control Hdwe Flow Ctl be selected These baud rates do not support XON XOFF software flow control Rcv Sw Flow CTL 8 Press the Select key The message window momentarily displays RATE IS SELEC
284. ry setting the dials in the middle where the dot appears Troubleshooting 9 33 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Placing a Service Call If you have a problem you cannot resolve contact your QMS vendor Your vendor is best equipped to immediately handle problem you may encounter If you cannot get service from your vendor see appendix A QMS Customer Support 9 34 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix A QMS Customer Support EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix A QMS Customer Support Several sources of help and information are available depending on the type of help you need 1 Your QMS printer vendor Your local vendor the one from whom you bought the printer may be best equipped to help you Your vendor has specially trained service technicians available to answer questions and the equipment to analyze your printer problems Your application vendor Sometimes printing problems have more to do with the application being used than with the printer In this case the application manufacturer is the best source of help Q FAX Q FAX a QMS information retrieval service provides application notes technical support notes on common printing problems and information about printer specifications options accessories con
285. s and Preventative Maintenance for information on replacing a toner cartridge EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 WAITING ON INPUT END JOB WARMING UP Service Call CALL FOR SERVICE 100K CHECKUP REPLACE FUSER The 100K CHI The printer compiler is waiting on incoming data for the first job in the job queue It is possible that the job did not end with an end of job indicator and therefore cannot end by itself The message is displayed in case you want to cancel the job or send an end of job indicator The message disappears if more input arrives from the port if the relevant specified timeout elapses or if you send an end of job indicator No other jobs can be printed until this job has ended The printer is warming up the fuser is at a low temperature Wait until the printer has warmed up before you print Messages A mechanical error has occurred and a service call is required Before calling for service make a note of the full message in the message window See appendix A QMS Customer Support for information on how to contact QMS When a CALL FOR SERVICE x appears the printer stops until the required service is complete Approximately 100 000 copies have been printed It s time for periodic maintenance and parts replacement to protect your printer and maintain print quality Approximately 60 000 copies have been printed It s time to replace t
286. s both a hard disk and a large amount of memory setting this option to Memory enhances printer performance See QMS Printer Configuration 4 35 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Document Option Commands for more information on DOC Other Optional Emulations If you have an optional emulation installed such as LNO3 Plus see the documentation that came with it for a description of the options under the Administration Emulations menu The QMS Crown Technical Reference and QMS Document Option Commands optional manuals available from your QMS vendor also have information on optional emulations Administration Emulations ESP Default This setting tells the printer what emulation to default to if the printer s emulation sensing technology is unable to identify the emulation needed for a particular job Default emulation options include PostScript PCL 5C HP GL and Lineprinter Optional emulations such as LNO3 Plus appear only if installed The factory default emulation for ESP is PCL 5C Any change to this option takes effect only after turning the printer off and on again Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Special Pages ADMINISTRATION SPECIAL PAGES PED Select Previous Next SPECIAL PAGES PRINT STATUS SPECIAL PAGES SPECIA
287. s client holds rasterized pages that are ready to be transferred to the print engine The amount of frame buffer storage affects the maximum size of any single page The size range and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system For example the factory default setting for a printer with 12 MB of RAM is the amount of memory necessary to print a four color letter or A4 size page in 300 dpi resolution The factory default setting for a printer with 24 MB of RAM is the amount necessary to print a four color letter or A4 size page in 600 dpi resolution Administration Memory K Mem Disk Cache This is the amount of RAM KB dedicated to the disk cache the area in which frequently used data is stored so it does not have to be continually read from and written to a hard disk either the standard internal drive or an optional external drive The size range Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your system If not enough memory is available for this client some or all of the optional hard disks may not be accessible and or an insufficient number of disk cache blocks may be available Administration Memory MB Printer Mem This memory client cannot be changed it is the amount of RAM installed in the printer that is available to be split among the other memory clients NOTE This isn t the same
288. s ee ee e ee ee ee eee eee Connecting the Printer Introduction ea PA ATA AA ATA eens Connecting to a Network Leu ue e ee e ee About Macintosh Networks 005 Connecting to a Macintosh 0 What You Need 0 0 eee ee ee eee Making the Connection 0 06 Printing from the Macintosh Installing the Printer Utilities Installing LaserWriter 8 x and the magicolor LX 4 1 PPD Installing Printer Description Files Testing Macintosh Communication Where to Go Now 00 0 0 2 eee eee Connecting toaPC 0 eee eee eee eee What You Need 0 eee eee eee How to Choose a Cable 00005 Making the Connection 0 PC Printing Software 000 e ee eee PS Executive Series Printer Utility Software Installing a Color PostScript Printer Driver Installing the Windows 3 1 Driver Printer Description Files PC Testing Parallel Communication Testing Serial Communication Checking Serial Communication Settings EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 About the Printer s Communication Modes Simultaneous Interface Operation SIO Emulation Sensing Processing ESP Modes Printer Configuration Introduc
289. s page 5 or more pages that lists all menu settings and fonts and emulations You select the type standard or advanced to print through the Administration Special Pages Status Page Type menu Then you can print the selected type through the front panel Administration Special Pages Print Status menu See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for details on printing from the front panel The standard status page lists printer identification information and settings current memory configuration timeout values communication settings input buffer sizes and the hard disk s status The standard status page also has alignment tickmarks in the lower left corner When the printer is properly aligned these marks are 0 5 from the left edge and 0 5 from the bottom of the page Use the Image Alignment option located in the Administration Engine menu described in chapter 4 Printer Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Configuration to change the placement of images on the page if necessary The advanced status page has the same information as the standard status page plus it lists configuration menu settings fonts and loadable emulations NOTE The sizes listed on the status pages are in bytes so you must divide the numbers on the status pages by 1024 to get the equivalent number of kilobytes entered through the front panel The Sample Page You can print
290. s settings for these parameters is shown in table below in terms of the equivalent code passed to the PCL line termination command lt ESC gt amp k G The second setting Ifiscrlf on criscrlf off is correct for most ASCII listings printed from UNIX machines PC listings should usually be done with both items set to off and Macintosh listings usually require the third setting Ifiscrlf off criscrlf on The following table shows the criscrlf Ifiscrlf commands and the corresponding PCL Line Termination command parameters LFISCRLF CRISCRLF PCL Code Comments Off 0 CR is CR LF is LF FF is FF Off 2 CR is CR LF is CR LF FF is CR FF 1 CR is CR LF LF is LF FF is FF 3 CR is CR LF LF is CR LF FF is CR FF IncludeFeature lfiscrlf value Purpose value Controls the default line termination mode the lt ESC gt amp k G command specifies the line termination treatment of a linefeed off treats linefeed as a linefeed or on treats linefeed as carriage return linefeed combination The result of various settings for these parameters is shown in the table included in the Set Carriage Return Line Termination discussion in terms of the Additional Technical Information D 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D equivalent code passed to the PCL line termination command The second setting Ifiscrlf on criscrlf
291. s used for connecting external hard disks Connecting the Printer 3 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 At the computer attach the other end of the cable to appropriate port The parallel port is female and the serial portis male Turn on the printer and the computer Test communication Parallel users You can do this by sending a file from one of your applications or you can see Testing Parallel Communication later in this chapter Serial users You can do this by sending a file from one of your applications or you can see Testing Serial Communication later in this chapter See PC Printing Software below to finish connecting the printer PC Printing Software If you re replacing a color PostScript printer you can probably start printing now with the printing software already in place You can refer to your application documentation for instructions on sending documents to the printer However if you want to be able to use all your printer s special features like QCOLOR automatic color control technology media size and type selection and collation or if you ve never printed to a color PostScript printer before we recommend you take a few minutes to make sure you have the following printing software installed B PS Executive Series Utilities B A color PostScript printer driver Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telef
292. samples Many of the procedures described in this manual involve using PS Exec B LaserWriter 8 x and the magicolor LX 4 1 PPD file Although your Macintosh system software came with a LaserWriter driver we recommend you install LaserWriter 8 x and the magicolor LX PPD a printer description file so you can take advantage of special printer features like QCOLOR automatic color control technology and media size and type selection B Application specific printer files If you plan to print from Aldus PageMaker Aldus FreeHand Aldus PrePrint Adobe Separator or QuarkXPress you ll also want to install the latest printer description file PPD PDX or PDF for your particular software You can probably print without them but you may not be able to access all your printer s features and you may get an error message telling you to change the printer name Installing the Printer Utilities 1 Insert the Macintosh Format PS Executive Series Utilities disk in your Macintosh 2 Double click the PSExec3 xx sea file 3 Inthe window that appears choose Continue 4 In the window that appears specify a folder to install the utilities to and choose Save 3 4 Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 After all the files are extracted choose Quit Open the Utilities folder in the PSExec 3 xx Folder and double click PSInstall to personalize the program Double click the PSExe
293. se baud rates do not support XON XOFF software flow control Rev Sw Flow CTL Parity Parity acts as a check bit to identify data transmission errors The options are none mark space odd or even The host or application parity setting must match the printer s parity setting The factory default is none Ignore Parity Ignore parity options are off or on the factory default is off Rev Sw The software communication protocol used by the Flow Ctl printer to control communication from the host The options are XON XOFF robust XON XOFF Printer Configuration 4 23 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Xmit Sw Flow Ctl Data Bits Stop Bits Hdwe Flow Ctl PS Protocol ETX ACK and none The factory default is XON XOFF The software communication protocol used by the host to control communication with the printer The options are none XON XOFF ETX ACK The factory default is none The number of data bits either 7 bits or 8 bits transmitted per character The factory default is 8 data bits The number of stop bits either 1 bit or 2 bits transmitted per character The factory default is 1 bit All the hardware flow control settings must be the same as those of the host The options are DSR POL Data Set Ready Polarity high or low factory default low DSR Data Set Ready on or off factory default off DTR POL Data Terminal Ready Polarity high or low factory default low
294. ser oil is not depleted If you have not solved the problem and no status message displays call your QMS vendor for help Printer Resets 1 Different versions of LaserWriter and Laser Prep being used on a network can cause printer reinitialization Downloading too many fonts can overload the printer s memory and cause the printer to reset to default Additional memory RAM is available and easily installed Contact your QMS vendor for information on RAM upgrades See chapter 8 Printer Options If the printer resets in other circumstances call your QMS vendor for service Troubleshooting 9 25 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Printer Locks Up If the INITIALIZING message remains in the message window and you are not be able to enter the Configuration menu or print even after you turn the printer off and on again the printer has probably been incorrectly configured You can reset to factory defaults by simultaneously holding down the Select and Online Offline key for about 10 seconds while turning the printer off and on again The reset process takes several minutes to complete Blank Pages 1 Check for a status message to be sure the printer is not out of toner or developer Be sure you removed the sealing tapes on newly installed toner and developer cartridges If no toner cartridges are empty and sealing tapes have been removed toner may have be
295. ses zu Beeintr chtigungen der Atemwege Haut oder Augenreizungen f hren k nnte Handling Conditions Toner and Developer Cartridges OPC Belt Cartridge Dispose of toner and developer in a safe manner meeting all local and federal regulations Handle only one color of toner and developer at a time to avoid contaminating other colors Use a toner vacuum to clean up powder spills in the printer if necessary If toner gets on your hands or clothing lightly dust off as much as possible If some remains rinse your hands or washable clothing with cool water hot water sets toner to remove the rest Do not touch the belt with your hands hold the cartridge by its green end handle or the two green side handles Do not expose the belt to direct sunlight Do not expose the belt to room light for longer than 2 minutes Keep the belt surface free of foreign material such as dust solvents moisture or corrosives Avoid abrupt changes of temperature and humidity for the cartridge Keep exposure to casual light to a minimum for example remove the top cover of the printer only when necessary and replace the cover as soon as possible Reinstall the pressure release and tension release pin sets one on the left side and one on the right in the Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 cartridge if it will be out of the printer for any extende
296. ssage window flashes INVALID PASSWORD for three seconds and then returns to the parent menu If you forget the password the system administrator can easily recover it by repeating the Using a Security Card procedure If you enter the correct password you are allowed to enter the menu The password for the two menus may be the same or different Printer Options 6 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Removing the Controller Board The first step in installing many printer options is removing the printer s controller board The following instructions for removing the controller board are written for advanced users Do not attempt this procedure if you have no experience working with circuit boards CAUTION It s very important to protect the printer controller board from electrostatic damage while performing this task If an anti static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient electrical ground for example the bare metal chassis of equip ment as on the back of a computer that is plugged in but turned off Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current present Turn off all power switches first Plastic rubber wood painted metal surfaces and telephones are not ac ceptable grounding points The printer isn t an acceptable ground ing point either bec
297. ssette or to print on media not supported by the standard cassette envelopes or thick stock 1 Use your application s print setup feature to select the manual feed tray and the media type you plan to use paper or transparency If your application doesn t allow this you can do it at the printer front panel a Press the Tray Select key until the Manual Feed LED is lit b Press the Media key until the LED for the media type you want paper or transparency is lit Choose the Paper setting for label and envelope printing If you re printing on thick stock paper that s between 24 and 43 Ib 90 g m and 163 g m then use the Operator Control Media menu to select this media type NOTE If you select media type from the driver the tray you re printing to must already have been set from the printer s front panel for the desired media type 2 Use your application s print setup feature to select any other printing options you want Print Media and Daily Operations 5 3 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 3 Open the manual feed tray by lightly pressing on the top right corner to release the spring latch fig 5 2 and then tilting the tray out and down Fig 5 2 Open the Manual Feed Tray 4 Move the paper guides on the manual feed tray to fit the size of the chosen media 5 Determine the printing side of the media an arrow on the media wrapping should point to
298. stedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Resolution option 4 48 Enhanced mode HP GL 4 32 Envelope jams preventing 9 19 Envelopes Imageable region B 5 Margins ou 4 E Sadie pai RO DN he B 5 SIZES Touda das dents Bhd Eh TA B 5 Envelopes printing 5 8 Environmental Requirements 2 2 Clearance iso atrae d eee 2 3 Degree of slant uno 2 2 H midity 25s eto E Ee eter 2 2 P hterol xl 4 beh eei 2 2 B 4 Temperature 0 0 2 2 Error Handler 0 04 4 40 Error Messages Change printer name 3 4 Printers 22 datadas So t bcr 9 26 Error page trailer 00 4 39 ErrorrecoVety cosa rore eei 9 17 ESP CIOWD bes enr MEME des 1 9 Selecting ocu 4 8 4 22 4 25 ESP Mode s Lise tete re hts 1 9 3 23 Default option 4 36 Timeout option 0 4 22 Troubleshooting 9 21 Ethernet E DS 1 11 4 28 B 8 EtherTalk 1 11 4 28 B 8 ETXJACK iie nete UTE Eee Bs 4 23 Executive Imageable region B 5 Margins 04 5 10 B 5 Medii cente bss Geared Began B 5 Printing on 000 4 19 SIZE pp ATA aate RR De shades B 5 Expand mode HP GL 4 32 Exterior cleaning 6 41 External hard disk 1 13 8 43 B 3 B 8 Controlling au ea ado 8 43 Formatting
299. strator 0 2 0 0 0000008 3 7 C 4 Separator aa dae erre en 3 7 AgfaFotoFlow se sess 7 13 Aldus FreeHand isate eos ton iure 3 7 3 8 PageMaker 0 0 0005 3 7 PageMaker Windows 7 3 Pr PEIDE S us Dr reo Rad NADAS 3 8 Alignment See also Image alignment Image not centered 9 31 Print engine 00 5 20 Angles See also Halftones SOLES Tee as ese ANA MATER RES 7 7 Anti static wristband B 10 Apple ColorSync 0 000 7 13 Apple Dar TIA oe sued b ATADA AA 3 1 AppleTalk o A ADA NNUS 4 26 Connection Luna aas 4 26 See also LocalTalk Modera dE RO TEAS 4 26 Spool buffer ao 4 27 Troubleshooting 9 23 Applications Macintosh 3 8 9 25 NOLES ues doa pet acetate Rtas A 2 PC agudas Noted Se A tre A n 3 13 ASCII files won t print 9 21 AUTOEXEC BAT 3 17 3 20 9 27 Automatic color control See QCOLOR Automatic error recovery 9 17 Avant Garde pes di oorp anien ke GAMA 7 18 B BACK PANEL OPEN 9 1 Banding Reducing pesones ie pecena 4 29 7 9 Banner page Header i3 rran Vee PERS 4 38 I 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Trado osa sa Heder elas EGER 4 39 Batid TAC ad ATA tee oak 3 20 4 23 Bulletin board 0 2 A 2 BELT CARTRIDGE MISINSTALLED 9 1 Bi directional parallel interface
300. sumables and prices In the United States and Canada call 800 633 7213 to reach Q FAX In all other countries call 334 633 3850 Have your fax number handy when you call or place the call from your fax machine s handset You can choose to have either a directory a list of currently available documents on a particular topic or a specific document sent to you The first time you call request the directory press 2 on your phone or fax keypad when prompted Then call back to request specific documents You can order up to three documents per call The QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System BBS QMS Customer Support A I EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix A The bulletin board contains technical support notes application notes drivers patches and utilities and you may leave technical questions not requiring an immediate response on electronic mail for the Sysop System Operator The bulletin board 334 633 3632 operates at 1200 2400 9600 and 14400 baud 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit with XMODEM YMODEM and ZMODEM capabilities Contact QMS Customer Technical Assurance for more information about the bulletin board CompuServe Through CompuServe you can ask general non technical questions share information with other users and access printing information and programs When you use CompuServe type the following command to go directly to the forum where QMS is located
301. t Printer Options 6 31 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Using an Optional Network Interface After you have correctly installed an optional network interface refer to the following for more information E The Administration Communications Serial section of chapter 4 Printer Configuration contains information about the PS Protocol option in the new optional network interface submenu that appears in the Administration Communications menu E The manual that comes with the optional network interface contains information about all other options in the new network interface submenu as well as instructions for connecting the printer to the network and for printing over the network B Your network documentation also contains information on printing over the network Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Centronics to Dataproducts Conversion Your printer is shipped with a Centronics parallel port but a kit for converting it to Dataproducts is available from your QMS vendor Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the conversion The Dataproducts conversion kit includes the following E An anti static wristband E Two 2 pin shunts small plastic pieces lined with metal E Two DIP resistors a 220 ohm and a 330 ohm E Two SIP resistors not necessary for this procedure m A 50 pin to 36 pin cable 1 Follow the instructions
302. t Controller Type Fonts Emulations Interfaces 12 pages per minute monochrome 6 pages per minute 2 or 3 color 3 pages per minute 4 color Assuming the use of letter or A4 size with 30 or less toner coverage 5 000 color prints per month 20 000 monochrome prints per month 250 sec maximum 180 sec average Not more than 58 dB A Main power switch back of printer Remote power switch front of printer 20 5 W x 22 3 Dx 14 6 H 520 mm W x 565 mm D x 370 mm H Approximately 106 lbs 48 kg without consumables or options installed Intel 80960CF RISC based controller operating at 33 MHz See chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output for a list of the resident fonts PostScript Level 2 PostScript Level 1 HP GL 7470A 7475A 7550A ColorPro HP PCL SC HP XL 300 Hexdump Lineprinter Optional emulations LocalTalk parallel serial SCSI optional network interface See Cable Pinouts later in this chapter for more information Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 SCSI Standard RAM Appendix B Supports optional SCSI disks up to a 512 MB 12 or 24 MB RAM upgradable to 64 MB Internal Hard Disk Size 80 MB IDE drive Upgradeable to 512 MB Electrical Requirements Power 120 V 10 Requirements Frequency 60 Hz 2Hz Power Standby Consumption 1000 W max 150 W ave Operation 1000 W max 250 W ave Energy Saver
303. t previously set up the tray you want to use for printing on Paper a At the printer front panel press the Online Offline key b Press the Tray Select key until the LED for tray you want to use for labels is lit on the front panel c Press the Media key until the Paper LED is lit on the front panel d Press the Online Offline key 3 Use your application s print setup feature to select Paper printing and any other printing options you want NOTE Any time you select a media type from the driver the tray you re printing to must already have been set from the front panel for the desired media type 4 Send your job Print Media and Daily Operations 5 7 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Printing on Letterhead or Other Preprinted Media Print letterhead or other preprinted media the same way labels are printed Make sure you place the media printing side up with the letterhead edge feeding into the printer first Printing on 3 Hole or Other Pre punched Media Print 3 hole or other pre punched media the same way labels are printed Make sure you place the media printing side up with the top edge feeding into the printer first Printing Envelopes Envelopes can be printed from the manual feed tray or from the optional envelope cassette If you purchased the optional envelope cassette for your printer see Using the Envelope Cassette in chapter 8 Printer Options To p
304. t the Security Card 3 Press the Menu key to enter the Configuration menu Press the Next key until the following message displays in the control panel message window CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION 6 14 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 4 Press the Select key to enter the Installation menu then use the Next key to view the menu options OPERATOR PASSWRD USE OPERATOR PWD ADMIN PASSWORD USE ADMIN PWD 5 To password protect the Operator Control menu press Select to display the message INSTALLATION OPERATOR PASSWRD Then specify the password See the section Entering Alphanumeric Values in chapter 4 Printer Configuration for detailed instructions for entering alphanumeric values 6 When you have entered the complete password press the Select key This saves the password and returns you to the Installation menu 7 To turn on the Password option press the Next key to display the message INSTALLATION USE OPERATOR PWD 8 Press the Select key to enter this submenu Then press the Next key to display the message USE OPERATOR PWD YES Ea 9 Press the Select key This activates the password option and returns you to the Installation menu 10 To password protect the Administration menu press the Next key to display NSTALLATION ADMIN PASSWORD Printer
305. tedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 6 Line up the notch on the 220 ohm DIP resistor with the notch on the RP1 socket Carefully insert the resistor s pins in the socket Then align and install the 330 ohm DIP resistor in the RP2 socket the same way fig 8 24 220 ohm Fig 8 24 Insert the New DIP Resistors Printer Options 8 37 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 10 If you didn t remove a network interface board skip to step 8 If you need to replace your network interface board installed follow the instructions below a Snap the network interface card onto the plastic support posts fig 8 18 b Using the two screws you removed earlier refasten the interface plate to hold the network card in place fig 8 18 c Hold the plastic ribbon cable so that the notch key on one end faces upward and slide it onto the interface card connector fig 8 19 Make sure no components on the board shifted or loosened during the procedure especially the SIMMs Follow the instructions in Replacing the Controller Board earlier in this chapter being careful to eliminate static electricity Use the 50 pin to 36 pin cable included in your kit to connect the Dataproducts cable to the parallel port Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Internal Hard Disk Installation These instructions explain how to rep
306. tedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Introduction This appendix provides additional technical information on how your printer works and memory management How Your Printer Works Your laser printer works using a combination of a mechanical and an electrical process The whole process comes down to five stages in which mechanical parts move media paper or transparencies through the printer and progressively stronger electrical charges transfer toner from area to area as it forms the image See figure D 1 for an overview of the mechanical part of the interior of your printer Toner Developer Units OPC Belt Cartridge Optical Unit Drum Paper Cassette Paper Feed Roller Manual Feed Tray Fig D 1 Interior View of the Printer Additional Technical Information D 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D A precharger unit puts an even charge across the OPC Organic Photoconductor belt Think of it as preparing a surface for painting When you send an image file the QMS controller uses that information to control when the laser beam in the optical unit turns on and off as it scans the OPC belt When the beam is on it discharges sections of the belt forming an image Next the belt passes under the developer to
307. ten in images gray scaling or shades of color may be too light or dark to show details clearly Using gamma correction on a gray scale image is similar to using a graphic equalizer on a home stereo the range of gray levels is adjusted for the best possible result This sharpens overall midrange contrast while shadows and highlights keep their original values Printer Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries If you use the QMS supplied Windows or Macintosh driver or an application capable of PostScript Level 2 printing such as Adobe PhotoShop the printer resident CRDs allow you to achieve device independent color Your printer comes with a Colorimetric CRD a Business CRD and a Photographic CRD Each CRD is provided in a 300 dpi and a 600 dpi version Choose a 300 CRD setting along with the Enhanced halftone when printing in 300 dpi resolution Choose a 600 CRD setting along with the Enhanced halftone when printing in 600 dpi resolution Optimizing Color Output EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 7 The Colorimetric CRD The Colorimetric CRD is designed for very basic color matching and one to one conversion from CIE color to CMYK color With Colorimetric chosen as the printer default CRD all colors are reproduced exactly unless a specified color is out of gamut out of the printer s range For out of gamut colors the Colorimetric CRD substitutes the closest in gamut color The result
308. ter Configuration INSTALLATION USE OPERATOR PWD EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Installation Use Operator Pwd The Use Operator Pwd menu determines if a password is required to enter the Operator Control menu The choices are on or off the factory default is off Installation Admin Password The Admin Password menu allows you to choose the password up to 16 characters used to enter the Administration menu when Use Admin Pwd is set to on Installation Use Admin Pwd The Use Admin Pwd menu determines if a password is required to enter the Administration menu The choices are on or off the factory default is off Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 The Operator Control Menu It s usually better to choose the selections available in Operator Control within your application if possible This is especially true in anetwork environment where other users jobs are likely to have different requirements than yours However this menu is provided in case your application or driver doesn t support all these selections CONFIGURATION OPERATOR CONTROL 7 Select Previous P Next OPERATOR CONTROL COPIES gt OPERATOR CONTROL OPERATOR CONTROL MANUAL FEED SIZE COLLATION OPERATOR CONTROL OPERATOR CONTROL MEDIA ORIENTATION OPERA
309. ter Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Security Cards An optional security card allows the Operator Control and Administration menus to be password protected so that only users who know the password can change printer configurations When a security cardis installed a new menu Installation appears in the printer s Configuration menu The Installation menu is used to password protect the printer CAUTION The printer must be off line before you insert or remove a security card If you forget to take the printer off line before you insert or remove a security card turn the printer off and back on again to regain access to the data stored in the printer s memory Using a Security Card A security card uses the same slots as font and emulation cards The card slots are located on the front of the printer below the control panel The following instructions explain how to use a security card 1 Take the printer off line CAUTION A security card fits in only one direction with the front label facing left toward the center of the printer Do not force the card in backwards this could damage the card and printer Printer Options amp 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 2 Insert the security card into either slot with the card s front label facing left toward the inside of the printer fig 8 11 Fig 8 11 Inser
310. terface using Quoted Binary on your QMS Crown printer However a data stream sent through the optional network interface using Quoted Binary would not be treated the same as a data stream sent through the same interface using Binary Advantages The main advantage of using the Binary and Fixed Binary PS protocol modes when sending binary data is that these modes compress the data stream allowing your documents to be smaller so you can send smaller jobs to the printer For example some device drivers can format bit map images as binary data instead of as ASCII hex data Implementation To implement PS protocol for sending binary data on your system you need a device driver available with some applications or operating systems or you can alternatively use a program to read the data and write out the quoted characters See your QMS vendor for any available information on device drivers or binary filter programs Additional Technical Information D 13 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Updated DOCS This section provides updated information on HP PCL 4 and PCL 5 DOCs This information will be merged into the appropriate manuals as they are revised But until then it supersedes the following QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual part number 1800216 001E and HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference Manual part number 1800304 001A PCL 5 Emulation Terminology Font A font is a unique set of
311. the download When downloading is complete IDLE appears on the printer s message window 10 When the software has finished installing turn the printer off and on again to activate the new code 11 At the DOS CAQMSSYS prompt type the following command to delete the SYSTEM DL file from the QMSSYS directory del dld Printer Options 6 53 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC toa Non Functional Printer Follow these instructions to download system software and fonts from a PC to a non functional printer NOTE These files take up about 5 5 MB of disk space when extracted 1 Insert the System Software DOS disk provided with your printer into your PC s floppy disk drive 2 At the DOS C prompt type the following command to extract the system software file to your PC s hard disk md qmssys cd Nqmssy s l a system If the system software disk is in another drive substitute the name of that drive fora 3 Insert the System Fonts 1 DOS diskinto your PC s floppy disk drive 4 Type the following command to extract the first PostScript fonts file to your PC s hard disk a af2psfnlJ 5 Insertthe System Fonts 2 DOS disk into your PC s floppy disk drive 6 Type the following command to extract the second PostScript fonts file to your PC s hard disk a af2psfn2J 7 Insert the PCL 5 Fonts DOS disk into your PC s
312. the printing side Make sure the media is in good condition free of folds tears and wrinkles 5 4 Print Media and Daily Operations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 6 Inserta single sheet of media printing side up with the top edge leading into the printer in the manual feed tray fig 5 3 until it reaches the rear of the tray inside the printer and lies flat If you re printing envelopes load the envelopes printing side up so that the flap side will be on the left when the envelope is pulled into the printer Fig 5 3 Insert a Single Sheet 7 Through your application print your document Print Media and Daily Operations 5 5 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Printing Transparencies 1 See Refilling the Media Cassette or Manual Feed earlier in this chapter for information on loading media If you haven t previously set up the tray you want to use for transparency printing a At the printer front panel press the Online Offline key b Press the Tray Select key until the LED for tray you want to use for transparencies is lit on the front panel c Press the Media key until the Transparency LED is lit on the front panel d Press the Online Offline key Use your application s print setup feature to select Transparency printing and select any other printing options you want If you re pr
313. ting 9 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 b Pull up the green handle on the OPC belt cartridge and then pull the cartridge out about 2 5 cm to relieve tension on the drum c Remove the media from the transfer unit end of the printer fig 9 7 Fig 9 7 Remove the Jammed Media d Close the transfer unit and the back cover e Firmly push the OPC belt cartridge back into the printer until it snaps into place The cartridge is in place when you can see the green arrows on the left and right inside metal frame of the printer Then push down the green handle to lock the OPC cartridge in place and close the manual feed tray f Skip to step 5 4 Remove the jammed media if the media is around the fuser roller by using the following procedure 9 12 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 leis The fuser unitis hot Do not remove a jam in this area until the fuser unit cools Nee eis Die Fixiereinheit wird sehr hei Bitte achten Sie darauf daf sie diese einige Zeit abk hlen lassen bevor Sie einen Papierstau beseitigen a Open the paper exit unit See Installing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle in chapter 2 if you are not sure how to do this b Remove the jammed media by pulling it straight out from above the transfer unit fig 9 8 Fig 9 8 Remove Media from the Transfer Unit Area 5 Close the transfer un
314. ting orientation and any other necessary options Then select OK 3 Fromthe File menu choose Print Directory or Print Window A dialog box appears 4 Select the printing options you want then click Print or OK Choose the Save button to save your settings for future print jobs A directory prints If no page prints check chapter 9 l roubleshooting Where to Go Now You re now ready to print from your Macintosh From this point you ll probably perform most printing tasks from your application For specific information check the printing section in your application documentation For information on print media types and sizes see chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations For information about using your printer s color printing features see chapter 7 of this manual Optimizing Color Output Connecting the Printer 3 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Connecting to a PC If you have a brand new computer before connecting the printer you should follow the manufacturer s instructions for setting up the computer including if it s not already installed any operating system software such as DOS and Windows What You Need To connect your printer to a single PC you need one of the following interface cables not included with your printer but available at any computer store E a parallel cable with 36 pin and 25 pin male connectors E or a serial cable w
315. tion 00 eee eee eee eee eee Printer Configuration Methods Configuration Method Priorities The Printer s Control Panel 000 The LCD Message Window The Control Panel LEDs The Function Keys eu ua ee ee ee ee Using the Configuration Menu Password protected Menus Selecting Options 0 00 00 eee eee Entering Alphanumeric Values Saving Configuration Selections The Main Menu Groups can e e ee e eno The Installation Menu ui e ee e ee Installation Operator Passwrd Installation Use Operator Pwd Installation Admin Password Installation Use Admin Pwd The Operator Control Menu Operator Control Media 05 Operator Control Copies 2 05 Operator Control Collation Operator Control Orientation Operator Control Inputbin Operator Control Chain Inputbins Operator Control Color Separation Operator Control Color Model Operator Control Manual Feed Size The Administration Menu s sess Administration Communications Administration Emulations EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 963
316. tion EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 Administration Special Pages Trailer Page This option controls the printing of a trailer banner error page for each print job A trailer page helps you monitor jobs Think of it as an accounting or tracking system For details on this page and what it monitors see Header and Trailer Pages in chapter 5 The trailer page also lists any errors generated by the printer while processing or printing your document This option can be set to off on on error and errors only with the default being off Setting this option to on error prints a trailer page with error messages generated during processing and printing of your job only if any error occurred Setting it to errors only prints error messages on the trailer page and omits other trailer page information Administration Special Pages Trailer Inputbin You can select the inputbin tray or cassette from which the printer pulls media when printing the trailer page Choices are upper and lower Upper is the factory default NOTE If you used the Administration Engine Inputbin x Name option to change the names of the input bins these names replace Upper and Lower in the message window Administration Special Pages Status Page Type This option controls the type of status page to print The options are standard the default or advanced See Administration Special Pages Print Status earlier in this secti
317. tion Special Pages menu If so go to question 3 If not check the following Is the printer off line before you try to enter the menu It should be Is the cassette empty If it is out of media the message PUT xxxxxx PAPER IN xxxxx BIN is displayed in the control panel message window and the Message LED is lit Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 Is the toner or developer depleted Are all printer doors and covers closed securely Is there a media jam 3 Is the printer receiving data from the computer If the Data LED blinks after sending the file the printer is receiving the data If so go to question 4 If not check the following Are the interface cables securely fastened Is the printer on line The Online LED should be lit Is your application set correctly Are the communication parameters the same as those on your host and printer If you are using the serial interface is the baud rate speed of data transmission of the printer the computer and your application the same If you still cannot identify the problem contact your QMS vendor 4 Is the printer printing codes or not printing at all when in ESP mode Reconfigure the port for the emulation in which you are trying to print See chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information on configuring the printer If ASCII or text files won t print make sure the ESP
318. tion card 1 If you are installing an LNO3 Plus or a ProCollection card turn off the printer Otherwise press the Online Offline key to take the printer off line the LED should be off CAUTION Font and emulation cards fit in only one direction with the front label facing left toward the center of the printer Do not force them in backwards this could damage the card and printer 6 10 Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 2 Insert the card into either slot fig 8 10 with the front label side facing left toward the inside of the printer Fig 8 10 Insert the Font or Emulation Card 3 Depending on the type of card you are installing either turn the printer on again or put it back on line Printer Options 8 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 To remove a card use the following procedure 1 If you are removing an LNO3 Plus or a ProCollection card turn off the printer Otherwise press the Online Offline key to take the printer off line the LED should be off 2 Pull the card out gently 3 Depending on the type of card you are removing either turn the printer on again or put it back on line NOTE If you are using an application make sure the printer driver installed supports the fonts on the card if you want to use those fonts If not contact your application manufacturer for support Prin
319. tion refers to the direction of signal flow as viewed from the printer Return denotes twisted pair return and is to be connected at signal ground level When wiring the interface be sure to use a twisted pair cable for each signal and always complete connection on the return side To prevent noise effectively these cables should be shielded and connected to the chassis of the system unit and printer respectively All interface conditions are based on TTL level Both the rise and fall times of each signal must be less than 0 2 microseconds The cable must have an overall braided shield Belden 8345 or equivalent Connectors must have shielded housings The overall shield must be bonded to the shielded housings at both ends of the cable Technical Specifications EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix B 1284 Parallel The Centronics parallel interface supports two modes for 1284 bi directional communication nibble mode and byte mode In nibble mode bi directional communication between the printer and the host is done in nibbles four bits with the low order nibble sent first A transfer of two nibbles is required for each byte of information In byte mode bi directional communication between the printer and the host is done in bytes The byte mode may be used by the host device in a DMA Direct Memory Access mode for more efficient operation When byte transfer is complete and there is no m
320. to prevent oil from spilling until the bottle is installed on the pin in the fuser slot 6 Hold the bottle spout end down with the label facing the printer s front over the slot in the top of the fuser unit fig 2 19 7 Lower the bottle into place making sure the spout on the bottom of the bottle aligns with the pin in the fuser slot The bottle is positioned correctly when it fits snugly in the slot and is flush with the top of the fuser unit Paper Exit Unit Fig 2 19 Install the Oil Bottle rear view Initial Printer Setup 2 27 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 8 Close the oil bottle retainer making sure the latch snaps back in place 9 Close the paper exit unit fig 2 20 Fig 2 20 Close the Paper Exit Unit rear view 2 28 Initial Printer Setup EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 10 Replace the top cover fig 2 21 Fig 2 21 Replace the Top Cover front view Now install the waste toner pack The next section covers this process Initial Printer Setup 2 29 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 2 Installing the Waste Toner Pack NOTE Forinformation on replacing a used waste toner pack see chapter 6 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance To install the waste toner pack 1 Remove the waste toner pack from its protective bag 2 Follow the instructions a
321. tor Control Orientation Use this option to determine the orientation of the image on a page either portrait vertical or landscape horizontal The factory default is portrait Operator Control Inputbin Use this option to select the input bin the standard upper cassette or the optional lower cassette from which to draw media The Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 factory default is upper The current selection is indicated by the corresponding LED NOTE A status message on the control panel will let you know immediately if the selected cassette isn t installed If the selected cassette is out of paper a paper out status message appears when you send the job to be printed Operator Control Chain Inputbins Use this option to turn on or off cassette switching chaining when the first cassette empties to another cassette with the same size and type of media The factory default is off Operator Control Color Separation Use this option to turn color separation on or off The factory default is off Operator Control Color Model Use this option to select between full color or monochrome printing The factory default is full color Monochrome must be selected as the default if you want to print 600 dpi jobs on a printer with less than 24 MB RAM You also may want to select monochrome when printing on legal size media because the printer s imageable region for f
322. ts in color at a rate of 3 to 6 pages per minute and in monochrome at 12 pages per minute It prints on plain or laser paper and on transparencies envelopes labels and thick stock and supports letter legal executive and A4 media sizes It also features an Energy Saver mode for reduced power consumption when not printing The printer ships with either 12 or 24 MB of RAM See Printer Features later in this chapter for a detailed list of your printer s capabilities Introduction 1 1 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 About This Manual This User s Guide is organized in three parts Installation chapters 1 through 3 Operation chapters 4 through 6 and Reference the rest of the manual A tab for each of these sections was included with your manual insert them at the beginning of the appropriate chapters to make it easier to navigate the manual Installation W Chapter 1 Introduction Gives an overview of the printer documentation and the printer s major features it also discusses the QMS Crown operating system and laser printing W Chapter 2 Initial Printer Setup Directs you in unpacking and installing the printer W Chapter 3 Connecting the Printer Discusses Simultaneous Interface Operation SIO and Emulation Sensing Processor ESP mode and explains how to connect the printer to a host through the LocalTalk parallel or serial port Operation W Chapter 4 Printe
323. tself XORed with the ASCII value 0x40 For example to send the value Ox14 T as data send the two character sequence 0x01 0x54 a T instead ASCII T is the result of XORing T with 0x40 This method of quoting guarantees that whenever the printer receives any of the eight control characters the control function is intended regardless of whether the preceding character is a A Any data byte not equal to one of the eight special control characters is transmitted by sending the data byte For more information on BCP and quoting see the PostScript Language Reference Manual Adobe Systems Inc Reading MA Addison Wesley 1990 ISBN 0 201 18127 4 the Adobe Serial and Parallel Communications Protocols Specification in Adobe Developer Support Adobe Systems Inc February 14 1992 and the PostScript Language Reference Manual in Supplement for Version 2011 Adobe Systems Inc January 24 1992 Additional Technical Information D 11 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D PS Protocol Menu for Optional Network Interfaces These options for the PS Protocol menus for optional network interface cards set the binary communications protocol BCP for communicating over that interface to a PostScript printer The default option is normal Any change to this menu takes effect immediately PS Protocol Menu Normal Normal Fixed QBinary QBinary Fixed Binary Binary Fixed Normal Enables standard
324. ty Considerations 0 B 9 Consumables B 9 B 10 Electrostatic discharge B 10 Non QMS accessories B 10 Non QMS consumables B 10 RE PAIS Cavey ac i pr ues TA AA A 3 Waste toner pack Installation 00 0005 2 30 Replacing lesse esee sess 6 4 Index When to replace 0 6 14 Weight ii oii 4 te chen tate adie said 2 6 8 1 Medias can red inte hooey B 5 Printed ula hes 2 2 B 2 Windows driver Installing Lebe 3 13 WordPerfect 0 0 00 eee ee C 4 WRITE ERROR sssss 8 44 X X ACTIVE JOBS sss 9 1 DEV LOW csse eben eme 6 7 X TONER EMPTY 6 4 9 3 Xmit Sw Flow Serial interface 00 4 24 XON XOFF eeeseee eee ee 4 23 Rob st sooner oes 4 23 I 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 I 20 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Index
325. uding the resident emulations Simultaneous Interface Operation SIO and Emulation Sensing Processor ESP technology All of these features enhance the printer computer interface Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 Simultaneous Interface Operation SIO Simultaneous Interface Operation SIO a standard feature of Crown technology enables your printer to communicate simultaneously with hosts through the LocalTalk parallel serial and optional network interface ports In other words SIO allows you to have more than one host communicating with the printer at one time Emulation Sensing Processing ESP Modes You can either allow your printer to operate in its default ESP mode or configure its ports to accept jobs in only a particular emulation for example PostScript only HP PCL 5 only or HP GL only The default printer communication settings can be changed through the Configuration menu which you access through the control panel In the Administration Communications menu you can choose a default emulation for the parallel and serial interfaces and in the Administration Emulations menu you can configure the printer defaults for each emulation mode The LocalTalk interface uses only PostScript Advanced users can also use PostScript operators to reconfigure printer ports The QMS Crown Technical Reference an optional manual available from your QMS vendor contains
326. ull color is limited to 8 1 x 11 7 205 90 mm x 297 18 mm Operator Control Manual Feed Size Whenever you switch media sizes in the manual feed tray you must tell the printer what the new size is The choices are letter legal executive A4 DL envelope and Com 10 envelope The factory Printer Configuration 4 19 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 4 default is letter or A4 See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for more information on media sizes NOTE If the selected paper size doesn t match the job size requested images may be positioned incorrectly on the page or may print off the edge of the page If this happens the resulting loose toner may adhere to the back of subsequent pages The Administration Menu CONFIGURATION Previous ADMINISTRATION DISK OPERATIONS ADMINISTRATION MISCELLANEOUS ADMINISTRATION ENGINE ADMINISTRATION Select pu ADMINISTRATION COMMUNICATIONS ADMINISTRATION MEMORY Fig 4 5 Administration Menu NOTE The items designated as factory default indicate those present when QMS ships the printer The default of the system is the value or option last chosen The options Printer Configuration DMINISTRATION MULATIONS ma DMINISTRATION PECIAL PAGES n gt ADMINISTRATION STARTUP OPTIONS EDNord Ist
327. ust then restart the operation from the beginning Two error messages you may see are READ FAILURE the disk has encountered a read error and WRITE ERROR either the hard disk had a write error or there is no room for data on the hard disk or in RAM Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 Identifying External Hard Disks The external hard disks are identified by their device numbers these numbers can range from DSKO to DSKS fig 8 28 The internal disk in your printer is always DSK6 Device numbers of external disks can be configured by the installer Optional Disks DSKO Through DSK5 Fig 8 28 External Hard Disk Device Numbers Formatting an External Hard Disk You have two methods of formatting an external hard disk E Formatting via the Control Panel W Formatting via PS Executive Series Utilities CAUTION Be extremely careful when formatting hard disks Only format DSK6 which contains the system software if there is a specific reason to do so For example you might reformat the disk to clear up unexplained disk behavior or to avoid a service call If you want to format DSK6 use the procedure in Formatting the Internal Hard Disk in this chapter If you do format DSK6 you will not be able to use the printer until you reload the system software provided on a with your printer See Installing Print System Software and Fonts later in this c
328. uters monitors and printers and the reduction of air pollution caused by power generation See Administration Engine Energy Saver in chapter 4 Printer Configuration for information on Energy Saver options NOTE The addition of some optional interfaces in some combinations may cause the product to become non Energy Star compliant QMS Crown Operating System Your printer features the QMS Crown multitasking printer operating system Some of its features are B Multitasking The printer receives compiles processes and prints simultaneously so jobs are printed more quickly and the host is free sooner E Simultaneous Interface Operation All interfaces are active at the same time buffering and processing data until pages can be printed which increases Introduction 1 9 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 throughput Each input buffer can be expanded with optional memory Emulation Sensing Processor Technology When in ESP mode selectable through PS Executive Series Utilities or the control panel the printer analyzes incoming data and selects the appropriate printer language from those available so users don t have to set switches or send commands to use different printer emulations ESP mode works with most popular commercially available applications Context Switching After initial use the state of an emulation and downloaded data fonts macros overlays is p
329. vailable characters E Use the Previous key to scroll backwards through the list of available characters m Use the Select key to move the cursor to the next character or when it s flashing on the last character to select the new value m Use the Menu key to move the cursor to the previous character or when the cursor s flashing on the first character to select the new value When you select a new alphanumeric value the printer checks to see if it is valid If it is invalid the alphanumeric value reappears for editing Press the Menu key to cancel any changes to the value A space no character is available as a selection You can set an alphanumeric value to null by entering spaces instead of characters Table 4 2 shows how to change an alphanumeric value using as an example the scaling percent option in HP GL emulation The table starts in the Administration Emulations HP GL menu NOTE Boxed type in the table below means that the value is flashing in the message window Printer Configuration EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT PREVIOUS SELECT ONLINE OFFLINE NEXT SELECT ONLINE OFFLINE What Happens You enter the HP GL submenu First character flashes to show it is ready to be changed You scrol he next value for the flashing character You scrol he next value for the flashing character You scrol he next value for the fl
330. verage especially for large areas for the highest quality documents or prepress proofs See chapter 5 Print Media and Daily Operations for detailed information on different media types Automatic Jam Recovery The printer has jam recovery so that after a jam is removed the printer automatically reprints the jammed page s and finishes the job Convenient Control Panel Operation The keypad and message window on the control panel allow easy access to the Configuration menu through which you can change printer defaults to suit your needs The message window and the LEDs indicate printer status Messages can be displayed in English French Spanish or German An optional security card allows access through the printer control panel to be password protected so that only users who know the password can change printer configuration Introduction I II EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 PS Executive Series Utilities Once you install this software on your host use its menus to access printer features such as printer naming and font and emulation downloading PS Exec also contains sample files that illustrate some of your printer s capabilities The PS Exec software is accompanied by Macintosh screen fonts and a PC screen printing utility You can also load new system software through PS Exec A README file explains how to install PS Executive Series Utilities and its online help explains ho
331. vermeiden da dies zu Beeintr chtigungen der Atemwege Haut oder Augen reizungen f hren k nnte 4 Grasp the tab on the top edge of the old waste toner pack and pull it out of the printer 6 16 Consumables and Preventative Maintenance EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 5 Place the old pack into the empty bag from the new waste toner pack and dispose of the old one following safety laws and regulations 6 Holding the new waste toner pack by the side tab on the top insert the pack into the printer until it fits securely Then lift up slightly on the tab to be sure the pack is level and centered fig 6 5 Fig 6 5 Lift up on Waste Toner Pack 7 Close the waste toner cover Consumables and Preventative Maintenance 6 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 6 Moving the Printer 6 18 CAUTION The printer is heavy be sure you have help when moving it Never lift it by the paper cassette slot and always lift it by the four corners that have ridges for a safer more secure grip Be sure to close the manual tray If there s any chance the printer may not remain level or may be jostled during the move you need to do the following to protect the printer B Remove the toner and developer cartridges E Remove the OPC belt cartridge and reinstall the pressure release and tension release pin sets in the cartridge B Remove the fuser unit and t
332. ving changes 4 12 Selecting options 4 8 String values 410 USING eene Res reme EG eR 3 20 4 8 Menu key eis ese es rr ete dis Ur 4 6 Message LED 4 4 Message window 00005 4 4 Control panel usua 9 1 Status messages 4 4 9 1 Micrografx Designer C 4 Min K Spool Parallel interface 4 25 Serial interface 4 23 Miscellaneous menu 4 50 Permanent Changes option 4 50 Restore Defaults option 4 50 D 3 MISFEED JAM 9 3 9 6 Missing DOS e eo 9 31 Mode AppleTalk 52 9 ves aod odin ed Vhs 4 26 LocalTalk interface 4 26 Parallel interface 4 25 See also Printing modes or mode name Serial interface 000 4 22 mode command DOS 3 20 MOLE ocu neha die eels Peine ER hog 7 6 Monochrome printing 5 14 Moving the printer 2 23 6 18 6 22 8 1 Multitasking us sao 1 9 N Names Inp tbim l5 ponet ERR 4 47 Inp tbin2 pyne a CALA Od S45 4 47 Qutputbins a ci zr hohe mest DEA 4 48 Naming the printer 1 11 National Service Index EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 US tr Noceda totes oped ale els ha A 3 NetWate n eec hue e B 8 Network administrator G 2 Network Interface 0 4 28 Instal
333. ving it from a hard disk If a hard disk is used and a lot of disk access is required adding memory to the disk cache might increase the printer s performance For example if many fonts are stored on disk increasing the disk cache size can help the printer access these fonts faster The amount of memory needed for the disk cache client depends on the size of the disk the number of disks the number of subdirectories on each disk and the amount of memory dedicated to caching The disk cache size should be set to 0 KB if no hard disks are connected to the printer or if the hard disks are connected Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D but are not being used However the hard disks remain unavailable until this client s size is increased The recommended amount of memory for the disk cache client is as follows B 120 KB minimum m 0 5 KB per MB of disk storage total for all disks MB Printer Mem This memory client shows the number of megabytes of RAM available to be split among the memory clients when disk swapping is turned off System Memory Listed as System Use on the status page this non configurable client is the amount of RAM that is used to run the printer s operating system It is never increased or decreased The system memory subtracted from the total amount of RAM identifies the amount of RAM available for all the other memory clients Hard
334. w to use the utilities PostScript Level 2 Compatibility The printer s Level 2 emulation is fully compatible with Adobe s PostScript Level 2 page description language whose features include device independent color improved memory and resource management data compression decompression filters and pattern and form caching Full support selectable through PS Executive Series Utilities or the control panel for PostScript Level 1 files is also included in this printer Resident HP PCL 5C and HP GL Emulation Your printer emulates the HP PaintJet XL300 PCL 5C printer This emulation supports the complete set of color commands in the XL300 13 outline typefaces and 7 PCL Courier and Lineprinter bitmap fonts see The Resident HP PCL Fonts in chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output for a font list It also supports HP GL 2 vector graphics This printer also emulates the following HP GL plotters 7550A 7470A 7475A and ColorPro Intel RISC based Controller A 33 MHz Intel 80960CF RISC microprocessor boosts processing speed Introduction EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 1 39 Resident PostScript Fonts Your printer comes with 39 licensed PostScript fonts All these fonts have multilingual character sets See The Resident PostScript Fonts in chapter 7 Optimizing Color Output for a list Printer Options W Full color 600 dpi printing in all supported page sizes If you upgrade to 2
335. wn into the printer Since toner images on the media aren t set avoid getting loose toner on your hands and clothes while removing the jammed media If you accidentally get toner on your hands or clothes lightly dust off as much as possible If some toner remains use cool not hot water to rinse it off your hands or washable clothing To avoid damage to the rollers always remove jammed media gently Troubleshooting 9 15 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 5 Remove the jammed media by pulling it straight out from above the transfer unit fig 9 11 Fig 9 11 Remove the Jammed Media 6 Close the transfer unit and then the back cover 7 Close the pressure release lever on the fuser unit 8 Close the paper exit unit When the control panel message window displays IDLE the printer is ready to print 9 16 Troubleshooting EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 9 If the Media Jam Message Stays On 1 If a jam message displays in the control panel message window clear the jam using the appropriate procedure from the Clearing Media Jams section earlier in this chapter If the message is still there make sure cassettes have the correct size media the size key slide on the back end of the cassette is set correctly and all covers and doors are completely closed 2 Ifthe message displays when no jam is evident make sure the pr
336. xperience working with circuit boards CAUTION It s very important to protect the printer controller board from electrostatic damage while performing this task If an anti static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient electrical ground for example the bare metal chassis of equip ment as on the back of a computer that is plugged in but turned off Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current present Turn off all power switches first Plastic rubber wood painted metal surfaces and telephones are not ac ceptable grounding points The printer isn t an acceptable ground ing point either because it must be unplugged before you perform this task If you don t have an anti static wrist strap discharge your body s static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any printer boards or components and before removing the tray assembly cover Redischarge your body each time after walk ing around and before touching the printer tray assembly again Handle the tray carefully and try to handle it by the edges only Printer Options EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 8 1 Using both hands carefully reinsert the controller board fig 8 13 making sure the controller board is properly seated in its connectors 2 Retighten the two mounting screws you loosen
337. xtend life of eo 6 5 Installation sese esses 2 11 Replacing eret ner RR nn 6 4 When moving printer 6 19 TONER EMPTY 202 6 4 TOP COVER MISINSTALLED 9 3 TORS etiarn UD eredi eres hn 3 1 Trailer inputbin 0 00 4 39 Trailer PASE A A hese ADA ees 4 39 Trailer Page option 4 39 translate operator 0 5 11 Transparencies 000 B 5 Density vocedneES nels 9 33 Error recovery aas ea aa ea ande 9 17 Imageable region B 5 Lower cassette n nunun 1 13 8 1 Marins opene osi Da ponit aee es B 5 Quality oferen nee edu were in 9 33 Selection os occ ce sas 4 6 4 17 5 11 SIZeS o d a ihe nie ah cots Dna 1 10 B 5 STEALS rec Reg dh Die ohne Rina beer edad 9 33 StOFage cue A ADA 5 11 B 6 DV POS ATA ADA A Aa e 5 11 Transparency Media menu 4 6 4 17 Transparency LED 4 5 Tray See also Cassette I 17 EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 See also Media cassette See Media cassette Tray Select k y dn ae oa enone 4 6 Troubleshooting 100K checkup 00 9 4 Adjust xxxxx bin sees 9 1 Appl Talkz sitet ave Ae 9 23 Back panel open 9 1 Belt cartridge misinstalled 9 1 Blank pages ete RR 9 26 Blurry images 9 31 Call for Service 0 0 9 4 Cancelling job
338. y is used to store any optional loadable emulations Additional Technical Information EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Appendix D Increasing this clients memory allows more complicated non PostScript jobs to print and allows larger optional emulations or multiple emulations to be loaded and ready to process jobs without having to be reloaded every time a job in that emulation is sent If an emulation is loaded to process a print job and there is not enough memory in the emulation client another emulation already loaded might be unloaded automatically to obtain the necessary memory If you notice a delay in printing between jobs that have different non resident emulations it s possible that emulations are being reloaded each time they are run Adding to the emulation client might eliminate this unloading and reloading and consequently increase throughput Also increase the emulation client if you are printing complex non PostScript jobs that might require more memory to process correctly Temporary Emulation Listed as K Mem Emul Tmp in the Administration Memory menu and as Emulation Temporary elsewhere this memory is used by non PostScript emulations for storing downloaded fonts forms and macros This allows context switching which is the ability to retain downloaded fonts and forms even after the printer changes from one emulation to another Context switching prevents repetitive downloadi
339. ystem If object type is or is not specified then all objects on the specified resource with the specified object id are removed 1 wildcard to 32767 specifies the ID of the object that is to be removed from the printer system Default 1 If the object id is not specified or if it is specified as or 1 all objects on the specified resource are removed Unlike the IncludeFeature install command the IncludeFeature remove command does not set any defaults and it is not directly related to the job to which it is attached This command allows you to remove external objects from the system without having to generate a job containing both the DOC command to set the appropriate current resource and the PCL code to delete the desired object If this command is specified more than once the last command received is the one that will be executed In the following example the remove 6 5 font command is executed and the remove 6 macro command is ignored IncludeFeature remove 6 1 macro remove 6 IncludeFeature resource resource id object code Purpose Establishes the current resource and the default object code value for the current job to which it is attached This command is identical to the IncludeFeature install DOC It is included for backward compatibility All downloaded objects are by default temporary and will be deleted at the end of a job unless Retain Temporary is set to on true or on compatib
340. ystem Folder If you use QuarkXPress install the magicolor LX PDF in the same folder as QuarkXPress QuarkXPress 3 3 allows you to access either a PDF or a PPD but in order to have access to all of your printer s features we recommend that you use the PDF To select the PDF go to Quark s Page Setup dialog box and hold down the Shift key while clicking the Printer Type listbox The selections that appear italicized are PPDs and the selections that appear non italicized are PDFs Also in the Page Setup dialog box make sure the EFIColor profile selection is None Note that the Quark LPI setting you choose determines which printer halftone settings are used The table below shows which printer halftone setting is used for each Quark LPI setting LPI Halftone 15 to 44 Printer default 45 to 54 53 Ipi x 45 degrees 55 to 79 71 lpi x 45 degrees 80 to 89 80 Ipi x 45 degrees 90 to 99 Enhanced 100 to 125 106 Ipi x 45 degrees 126 and higher Printer default Testing Macintosh Communication You can test communication between the printer selected in the Chooser and the Macintosh by sending a file to the printer from an application see your application documentation for more information or by printing a directory as described here Connecting the Printer EDNord Istedgade 37A 9000 Aalborg telefon 96333500 Chapter 3 1 Display a disk or folder window 2 From the File menu choose Page Setup Select paper size prin

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

κατάλογο - Γαλλικό Ινστιτούτο Ελλάδος  User`s Manual - Sewell Direct  Zanussi ZDT 6894 Instruction Booklet  Témoignages Rémi, Raymonde et Alice (23: 10/2004)  BOB LED User Manual Rev. 4    Manuel d`utilisation - Migros  Evaluation Kit for Power Line Communication User's Manual  Respect, mode d`emploi  Samsung GU12H5009R8IEU LED lamp  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file